You are on page 1of 235

GE Fanuc Automation Europe

CNC Controls

FAPT MACRO COMPILER


For PersonalComputer

Operator's Manual

B-66102EN/10

TECHNOLOGY AND MORE

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.


All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the


government of the country from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the


various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,
or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in
this manual should be regarded as impossible.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

B66102E/07

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s1

B66102E/10

PREFACE

PREFACE

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :


Product Name

Abbreviations

FANUC Series 0MODEL A, B, C

0A/B/C

Series 0A/B/C

FANUC Series 0iMODEL A

0iA

Series 0iA

FANUC Series 15MODEL A

15A

FANUC Series 150MODEL A

150A

FANUC Series 15MODEL B

15B

FANUC Series 150MODEL B

150B

FANUC Series 15iMA

15iMA

FANUC Series 150iMA

150iMA

FANUC Series 16MODEL A

16A

FANUC Series 16MODEL B

16B

FANUC Series 160MODEL B

160B

FANUC Series 16MODEL C

16C

FANUC Series 160MODEL C

160C

FANUC Series 16iA

16iA

FANUC Series 160iA

160iA

FANUC Series 16iB

16iB

FANUC Series 160iB

160iB

FANUC Series 18MODEL A

18A

FANUC Series 18MODEL B

18B

FANUC Series 180MODEL B

180B

FANUC Series 18MODEL C

18C

FANUC Series 180MODEL C

180C

FANUC Series 18iA

18iA

FANUC Series 180iA

180iA

FANUC Series 18iB

18iB

FANUC Series 180iB

180iB

Series 15A

Series 15B

Series 15

Series 15iA
Series 16A
Series 16B

Series 16C

Series 16

Series 16iA

Series 16iB
Series 18A
Series 18B

Series 18C

Series 18

Series 18iA

Series 18iB

FANUC Series 20

Series 20

FANUC Series 20i

Series 20i

p1

Series 0

Series 20

PREFACE

B66102E/10

Product Name
FANUC Series 21TA

Abbreviations
21TA

FANUC Series 21TB

21TB

FANUC Series 210TB

210TB

FANUC Series 21MB

21MB

FANUC Series 210MB

210MB

FANUC Series 21iA

21iA

FANUC Series 210iA

210iA

FANUC Series 21iB

21iB

FANUC Series 210iB

210iB

Series 21A

*1
Series 21B
Series 21
Series 21iA

Series 21iB

*1 The Series 21TB is available in two models: control unit A and


control unit B. The manual may refer to these models as the
21TB (controller A) or 21TB (controller B) in those cases
where their functions differ.

Other manufacturers
products referred to in
this manual

IBM and PCDOS are registered trademarks of International


Business Machines Corporation.
:
MSDOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft corporation.
All other product names identified throughout this manual are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
:

p2

Table of Contents

B66102E/10

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1


PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1

FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1

INSTALLING THE SYSTEM FROM THE FAPT MACRO


COMPILER SYSTEM FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INSTALLING THE EXECUTOR FILE FROM THE FAPT


MACRO LIBRARY FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3

PATH SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

3.4

COMPILER SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

3.5

SPECIFYING ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

3.2

3.5.1
3.5.2

Selecting a RS232C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
12

4. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

4.1

MACRO COMPILER (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

4.2

MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

4.3

ROMFORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (CNC) (FOR SERIES 16/18/20/21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

4.4

ROMFORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER


(FANUC PMC WRITER/FANUC FA WRITER) (FOR SERIES 0, 15A, 16A, 18A) . . . . . . . . .

23

4.5

SERIAL INTERFACE UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

4.5.1
4.5.2

4.6

Macro Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Macro Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24
24

ROMFORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC FA WRITER, GPIB INTERFACE)


(FOR SERIES 0, 15A, 16A, 18A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

CONVERSION TO A MEMORY CARD FORMAT (MMCARD) (THIS FUNCTION IS


USED IN THE SERIES 15B/16B/16C/18B/18C/20/21B/16iA/18iA/21iA/
16iB/18iB/21iB/0iA.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

6. RS232C INTERFACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

7. GPIB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR SERIES 0, 15A, 16A, 18A) . . . . . . . . . .

34

8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35

9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

4.7

c1

Table of Contents

B66102E/10

APPENDIX
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) .

39

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53

C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE


FOR THE FANUC SERIES 16/18 SUPER CAP M/SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . .

79

E.1
E.2

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80

MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81

E.2.1
E.2.2
E.2.3
E.2.4
E.2.5

E.3

Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Conversion List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONVERSION OF TABLE DATA WITH THE MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


E.3.1
E.3.2
E.3.3

81
81
81
82
82

83

Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

83
83
83

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/


SUPER CAP II T WITH SERIES 16i/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

84

F.1

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

85

F.2

DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86

F.3

CAP CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

87

USER MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

88

F.4

F.4.1
F.4.2
F.4.3
F.4.4
F.4.5

F.5
F.6

88
88
89
89
89

RESTRICTIONS IMPOSED ON THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

90

CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91

F.6.1
F.6.2

F.7

Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Developing a User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring the User Module to FROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executing the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


F.7.1
F.7.2

91
92

94

Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

94
95

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16B/C, 18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA) . . . . . . . . . . . .

97

G.1

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.1.1
G.1.2

G.2

Starting the BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


System File and User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


G.2.1
G.2.2

System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c2

98
98
99

100
101
104

Table of Contents

B66102E/10

G.2.3
G.2.4
G.2.5
G.2.6
G.2.7
G.2.8

System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End of Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

106
108
110
112
113
114

G.3

ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

G.4

SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

G.4.1
G.4.2
G.4.3
G.4.4

G.5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


G.5.1

Determining the Cause of the Nospace State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118
118
119
119

120
120

H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16i/18i/21i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122


H.1

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.1.1
H.1.2
H.1.3

H.2

SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


H.2.1
H.2.2
H.2.3
H.2.4
H.2.5
H.2.6
H.2.7
H.2.8

H.3

Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Basic System Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123
123
124
124

125
126
129
131
132
134
137
138
139

140

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 16B/C, 18B/C, 21TA,


SERIES 16i/18i/21iA/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
I.1

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144

I.2

PROCESSING BY PCODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145

I.2.1
I.2.2
I.2.3
I.2.4
I.2.5
I.2.6
I.2.7
I.2.8

Starting the P-code Loader Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


RAM Initialization Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Start Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading End Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145
146
147
148
149
152
153
155

I.3

PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156

I.4

ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

J. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160


J.1
J.2

IPL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

PROCESSING FLOW FOR THE PCODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

J.2.1
J.2.2
J.2.3

RAM Initializing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Loading Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c3

162
163
163

Table of Contents

J.2.4
J.2.5
J.2.6
J.2.7

B66102E/10

Loading End Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164
166
167
168

J.3

PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

169

J.4

ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

172

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 15B/15iA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173


K.1

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174

K.2

MEMORY CARD SPECIFICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

K.3

STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

K.4

REGISTERING A MEMFORMAT FILE, STORED ON A MEMORY CARD, INTO FROM . .

178

K.5

SAVING A MEMFORMAT FILE FROM FROM TO A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

182

K.6

REGISTERING A ROMFORMAT FILE, STORED ON A ROM CASSETTE, INTO FROM . .

184

K.7

TYPES OF FILES IN FROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188


M. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
M.1

SERIES 15i COMPILE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192

M.2

PARAMETERS OTHER THAN SERIES 15i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203

M.2.1
M.2.2

Compile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executer Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203
210

N. SUPER CAP T/SUPER CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212


N.1

SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

N.2

COMPILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

N.3

LINKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

N.4

WRITE TO THE MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

216

N.5

LOADING TO FLASH ROM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

217

c4

1. GENERAL

B66102E/10

GENERAL

The MACRO Compiler/Executor function stores programs created using


custom macros (macro programs) in ROM so that machine tool builders
can implement their own conversational screens.
The FAPT MACRO Compiler is a macro compiler utility to implement
the MACRO Compiler/Executor function on personal computers
available on the market.
The FAPT MACRO Compiler is applicable to the following CNC
systems:
1) Series 0
2) Series 15
3) Series 16
4) Series 18
5) Series 20
6) Series 21
This manual describes the procedure to store macro programs in ROM by
using the macro compiler utility. For the syntax rule for creating macro
programs, refer to the manuals listed below.
1) FANUC Series 0/0-Mate Programming Manual (Macro
compiler/Macro executor) (B-61393E-1)
2) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro
executor) (B-61213E-1)
3) FANUC Series 15MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro
Compiler/Macro executor) (B62073E2)
4) FANUC Series 0i/16/18/20/21 Programming Manual (Macro
compiler/Macro executor) (B-61803E-1)
5) FANUC Series 15iMODEL A Programming Manual (Macro
Compiler/Macro executor) (B63323EN2)

1. GENERAL

B66102E/10

1.1
FEATURES

(1) Macro programs can be edited using a commercially available screen


editor that operates under the MS-DOS environment.
(2) The symbolic macro compiler function allows macro programs to be
coded in symbolic format, and also allows comments to be coded.
(3) A program that references macro variables in array format can be
created.
(4) Compile list output makes macro program development, debugging,
and maintenance much easier.
(5) A linker (linkage editing) function is employed which allows partial
compilation and also facilitates the development and maintenance of
macro programs common to several models.
(6) The macro compiler utility, used with the CNC executor RAM
operation function, can transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC
system. This capability allows macro programs to be developed and
debugged without writing ROM.
(7) Linker output (ROM-format file) operation is separated from writing
to a macro ROM by the ROM file transmitter with the FANUC
PMC-Writer/FA-Writer. With this feature, the same macro ROM can
be created at any time by preserving ROM-format files.
(8) A ROM file transmitter function based on the GP-IB interface allows
connection to the FANUC FA Writer for high-speed writing to a
macro ROM verification.

1. GENERAL

B66102E/10

1.2
OVERVIEW

The FAPT MACRO Compiler/Executor function enables the FANUC


CNC users to develop their own macro programs in a macro language,
store the macro programs in ROM as a macro ROM by using the macro
compiler, and execute the macro programs with the macro executor
function of the FANUC CNC systems. (See the conceptual diagram on
the next page.)
The macro compiler utility enables macro program development,
compilation, and writing to a macro ROM on a personal computer
operating under the MS-DOS or PC-DOS.
The macro compiler utility functions are listed below.
(1) Macro compiler
D Symbolic macro program analysis
D Macro program compilation
D Object program output
D Reference list/compile list output
(2) Macro linker
D Linkage editing of specified object programs and macro
executor/compile parameters
D ROM-format file output
D Link list output
(3) ROM file transmitter (CNC)
D ROM-format file transfer to the CNC
D Macro executor RAM operation
(4) ROM file transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/FANUC FA Writer)
D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette
D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files
(5) Serial interface utility
D Reading/transferring programs from the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P
(6) ROM file transmitter (FANUC FA Writer (GP-IB interface)
D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette
D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files
(7) Memory card format conversion
D Converting macro programs to a format capable of accepting write
from a memory card
The macro compiler utility is distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) floppy disk
as an MS-DOS/PC-DOS package utility.
The utility does not provide functions such as those for editing macro
programs, and saving and restoring programs to and from floppy disks.
For these functions, use MS-DOS/PC-DOS commands and editors
available on the market.

1. GENERAL

B66102E/10

Create a macro program using an editor. (An editor is


not supplied.)

The macro program (source file) must be in standard


MS-DOS text format.

The macro compiler generates an object file. It also


creates reference and compile lists at the same time
as the object file.

The object file is linked based on a link control file to


generate a ROM-format file. The editor creates the
link control file (xx.MEX).

MS-DOS
Editor

Macro Program
(Source file)

MCOMP0
MCOMP15
MCOMP15I
MACRO
Compiler
(xx.LNK)

(xx.REL)

LINK
Control
file

Macro Program (Obj file)

MLINK
MLINK15I

*
MACRO
Linker

Macro Library
file

FANUC supplies a macro library for each CNC


model.

(xx.ROM)
*

The ROM-format file contains macros in binary form


output by the linker for a macro cassette.

ROM format file

MTRNSC

MMCARD
MMCARD15
MMCARD15I

MROMWT
/MROMVF

ROM file
Transmitter

RS-232-C
line
CNC
Series
16/18/20/21-TA
RAM Operation

The file is transferred to CNC through


RS-232-C to execute RAM operation (Series
16/18/20/21-TA).

Memory Card file


Converter

RS-232-C line
GP-IB I/F

The ROM format file is executed on the CNC


using the following methods:

(xx.MEM)

FANUC
PMC Writer
FA Writer

Memory Card
Reader
/Writer

Macro
cassette

Memory
Card

The file is transferred to FANUC PMC Writer/


FA Writer, written in macro cassetter or ROM,
then executed (Series 0/15-A/16-A/18-A).
The file is converted in Memory card format,
transferred to CNC from memory card, then
executed (Series 15-B/16-B/18-B/16-C/18-C
/20/21B/15iA/16iA/18iA/21iA/16iB/
18iB/21iB).

Fig.1.2 MACRO Compiler Utility Function Conceptual Diagram

2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

B66102E/10

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

(1) Personal computer:

Main memory
OS

(FMR/PC98)
(PC-AT)

(Fujitsu : FMR Series)


(NEC : PC98 Series)
(IBM : PC-AT Series)
640K bytes or more

MS-DOS Version 3.1 and later


PC-DOS Version 3.3 and later

Hard disk

About 1M bytes is required for install the system


(Caution 1)

Floppy disk drive

5-inch floppy disk drive (2HD) 3.5-inch floppy disk


drive (2HD) for 15i/16i/18i/21i (Caution 2)

Serial interface

RS-232-C serial interface

Miscellaneous
(Option)

Printer (Note 1)
GP-IB interface (Note 2)

(2) FANUC PMC-Writer or FANUC FA-Writer


Serial interface (RS-232-C)
GP-IB interface (option/FANUC FA-Writer only)
CAUTION
1 The macro compiler utility software is installed on hard disk.
This software occupies a hard disk space of about 1M bytes.
In addition, developed macro programs and list files/object
files generated at compile time are output as files on hard
disk. So the size of hard disk depends on the macro
programs developed.
2 The macro compiler utility software is distributed with a
5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series
15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. The macro executor is also
distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk
for series 15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. A 5-inch or 3.5-inch
floppy disk drive is needed to install the system and
executor files.

NOTE
1 The macro compiler and macro linker output a reference list,
compile list, and link list as MS-DOS text files to hard disk.
For output to the printer, use an MS-DOS/PC-DOS
command.
Text files are output in a format assuming an 80-character,
60-line printer.
2 The FANUC FA-Writer allows high-speed writing to
ROM/verification based on the GP-IB interface. (Note that
only NEC PC98 Series and IBM PC-AT Sereis currently
supports this function.)

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

B66102E/10

SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

The FAPT MACRO Compiler software is distributed with two 5-inch


(2HD) floppy disks or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series
15i/16i/18i/21i. To use the software, load the software to the hard disk
from the system floppy disks.
No.

Name

FAPT MACRO Compiler system floppy disk

FAPT MACRO Library system floppy disk

To install the system, some knowledge of the hardware and software of


a personal computer to be used is needed. In particular, the user should
be familiar with the handling of basic MS-DO/PC-DOS commands and
files such as CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT.

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

B66102E/10

3.1
INSTALLING THE
SYSTEM FROM THE
FAPT MACRO
COMPILER SYSTEM
FLOPPY DISK

Examples

This operation installs the FAPT MACRO Compiler system software on


the hard disk. First set the FAPT MACRO Compiler system floppy disk
in the floppy disk drive, then activate MSETUP.BAT on the floppy disk.
> ?: \ > MSETUP <in> <out>

: The root directory of the system floppy disk contains


MSETUP.BAT.
<in> : Specify the name of the drive containing the system floppy
disk.
<out> : Specify the drive name of the hard disk to hold the system.
? :

The system floppy disk is set in drive B:, and the system is installed on
the hard disk of drive A:.
> B: \ > MSETUP B: A:

This operation creates the following directories in drive A:, and the
system software and a sample program are copied to the hard disk.
A:\MCOMP

\TOOL
\MEX
\USR

Explanation of the
directories

\SAMPL

a) \MCOMP\TOOL
The FAPT MACRO Compiler system software, batch files,
document files, and so forth are stored under this directory.
MCOMP0.EXE/MCOMP15.EXE/MLINK.EXE/
!System software
RSFMR.BAT
!RS-232-C setting batch file for Fujitsu FMR Series
RSPC98.BAT
!RS-232-C setting batch file for NEC PC98 Series
RSPCAT.BAT
!RS-232-C setting batch file for IBM PC-AT Series
SYSTEM.DEF
!System common symbol definition file (for $INCLUDE)
b) \MCOMP\MEX
Library file is stored under this directory.
This file is loaded from the FAPT MACRO Library floppy disk.
c) \MCOMP\USR
Under this directory, create directories used to develop macro
programs.
A:\MCOMP

\TOOL
\MEX
\USR

\SAMPL
\MODEL-A
\MODEL-B
\MODEL-C

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

B66102E/10

d) \MCOMP\USR\SAMPL
Under this directory, the files including such a link control file,
compiler/link result files, and program files as described in
Appendix D are stored. Use these files as reference information
for development.

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

B66102E/10

3.2
INSTALLING THE
EXECUTOR FILE
FROM THE FAPT
MACRO LIBRARY
FLOPPY DISK

Examples

This operation loads the executor file under the library directory of the
FAPT MACRO Compiler system installed by the operation of Section
3.1.
As with the FAPT MACRO Compiler system floppy disk, set the FAPT
MACRO Library floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, then activate
ESETUP.BAT on the executor floppy disk.
> ?:\>ESETUP <in> <out>

: The root directory of the library floppy disk contains


ESETUP.BAT.
<in> : Specify the name of the drive containing the library floppy
disk.
<out> : Specify the drive name of the hard disk holding the system.
? :

Set the library floppy disk in drive B:, and the library file is stored in the
system installed on the hard disk of drive A:.
> B:\>ESETUP B: A:

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

3.3
PATH SETTING

B66102E/10

All system software is contained under the \MCOMP\TOOL directory.


So specify this directory by path setting with AUTOEXEC.BAT.

10

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

B66102E/10

3.4
COMPILER SERIES

To match the CNC series, there are three types of the FAPT MACRO
Compiler system:
a) For Series 0/Series 16/Series 18/Series 20/Series 21
b) For Series 15A/15B
c) For Series 15iA
These Compiler systems are for the respective series only. Compiling the
same macro program using these compiler systems generates different
object codes. For this reason, be sure to use the execution files (macro
compiler/linker/memory card converter) and library files suitable to the
development model. (The library file names are given in Appendix L.)
If multiple systems are to be installed on the same personal computer, it
is recommended that a separate directory be used for each CNC series.
CNC Series and Corresponding Software (See also Fig. 4.7.)
CNC series

Macro compiler

0/16/18/20/21

MCOMP0

15A/15B

MCOMP15

15iA

MCOMP15I

Macro linker
MLINK
MLINK15I

Memory card
format converter
MMCARD*1
MMCARD15*2
MCARD15I

*1 MMCARD is for the Series 16B/16C/16iA/16iB/18B/18C/18iA/18iB/20/


21B/21iA/21iB/0iA only.
*2 MMCARD15 is for the Series 15B only.

11

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

B66102E/10

3.5
SPECIFYING
ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLES
3.5.1
Selecting a
RS232C/GPIB
Interface Control
System (MDEV)

A macro program or a ROM-format file is transferred via the


RS-232-C/GPIB interface. The interface control systems vary between
personal computer manufacturers. Control software including MPOUT,
MROMWT, and MROMWTG is therefore designed to determine the
control system according to the setting of the MDEV environment
variable.
Specify the MDEV environment variable as follows in
AUTOEXEC.BAT before using control software.
Setting of the MDEV environment variable
set MDEV=PC98 : For the NEC PC98 Series
set MDEV=FMR
: For the Fujitsu FMR Series
set MDEV=IBM
: For the IBM PC Series
When no MDEV environment variable is specified, control software runs
in the control system for the NEC PC98 Series.

3.5.2
Specifying a
Temporary File Output
Destination (MTMP)

The macro compiler or macro linker generates or deletes some temporary


files (work files) for compiling or linking. The destination to which the
temporary files are output can be specified with the MTMP environment
variable.
Setting of the MTMP environment variable
set MTMP=B:\TEMP

If the temporary file output destination is specified as a RAM disk,


compiling or linking time can be reduced.
When no MTMP environment variable is specified, temporary files are
generated in the current directory for compiling or linking and deleted
after compiling or linking

12

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

FUNCTIONS

13

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.1
MACRO COMPILER
(MCOMP0/MCOMP15/
MCOMP15i)

(1) Operation
The macro compiler can compile macro programs created in the
MS-DOS text file format. The macro compiler outputs an object file
for the macro linker, reference list file, and compile list file.
*1

*2

A:\> MCOMP0 file-spec [parameters]


==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21)
A:\> MCOMP15 file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 15A/B)
A:\> MCOMP15I file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 15iA)

Source File

Object File

Macro
Program

Object
MCOMP0
MCOMP15
MCOMP15I

Program

(xx.SRC)

(xx.REL)

Reference List File(xx.REF)


Compile List File (xx.LST)
MACRO COMPILER
1 O0001;
2 #100=#101+10;

*1 file-spec
This specifies a macro program source file. The extension of a
source file name must be .SRC. Source files to be compiled can
be specified in three ways:
(1) Compilation of a single file
A:\> MCOMP0 ABC=> Compiles ABC.SRC.
(2) Compilation of multiple cards by using a wild card
A:\> MCOMP0 ABC*=>

Compiles all files whose names start with ABC and have the
extension .SRC,
(3) Selective compilation according to link control file
specification
A:\> MCOMP0 @ABC=>

Compiles all files specified in the link control file (file name:
ABC.LNK).
CAUTION
As described in Section 3.4, even if the same macro
program is compiled, the macro compiler for Series
0/16/18/20/21 creates an object file different from an object
file created by the macro compiler for Series 15 and Series
15i. Select the compiler that matches a development
model.

14

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

*2 [parameters]
This specifies compile conditions.
NR : Outputs no object file. If this parameter is omitted, an
object file with the extension .REL is output.
L1 : Outputs no compile list file. If this parameter is omitted,
a compile list file with the extension .LST is output.
L2 : Outputs no reference list file. If this parameter is omitted,
a reference list file with the extension .REF is output.
L3 : Outputs a macro program file. If this parameter is
omitted, no macro program file is output. A macro
program file is output with the extension .PRG.
PR : Makes no symbolic macro program analysis. Specify this
parameter when a program coded in standard macro
program format is to be compiled. No reference list file
is output. Even if this parameter is not specified, a macro
program can be compiled without trouble. However, this
parameter can save time required to make a symbolic
macro program analysis and can also save space for
reference list file output.
Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output.
See item (7).
Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is
output.
Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is
output.
Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is
output.
(2) Macro program source file
A macro program source file must be created in MS-DOS text file
format. At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .SRC.
The macro compiler can compile a macro program coded in symbolic
format.
For detailed information, see Chapter 5.
The macro compiler can also compile a program coded in standard
macro program format. In this case, specify the command parameter
-PR. This parameter can save time required to make a symbolic
macro program analysis and can also save space for reference list file
output.
(3) Object file
An object file output by the compiler is subject to processing by the
macro linker. The name of an object file is the same as the source file
name, except that the extension .REL is assigned to the object file.
(4) Reference list file
The reference list file is a list file output from macro program analysis
processing. A source program, errors, error codes, symbol name
cross reference information are listed. The name of a reference list
file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .REF
is assigned to the reference list file. For output to a printer, for
example, use a standard MS-DOS command.
15

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

(5) Compile list file


A compile list file is output as a result of macro program compilation
after symbolic macro program analysis. A source program, errors,
error codes, variable cross reference information, object file size
information, and so forth are listed. The name of a compile list file
is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .LST is
assigned to the compile list file. For output to a printer, for example,
use a standard MS-DOS command.
(6) Macro program file
By specifying the command parameter -L3, a macro program after
macro program analysis processing can be preserved as a file. The
name of a macro program file is the same as the source file name,
except that the extension .PRG is assigned to the macro program file.
By using the serial interface utility described in Section 4.5, this file
can be output to the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line.
(7) Specifying the destinations to which the compiler outputs files
The directory of the destinations to which the compiler outputs files
can be specified as desired according to compiling conditions.
However, this function is only effective for FAPT MACRO Compiler
Version 02.1 and later versions.
Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output.
Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is
output.
Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is output.
Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is
output.
Example)
Compiling TEST.SRC and outputting TEST.REL to B:\OBJ
MCOMP0 TEST -FoB:\OBJ

16

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.2
MACRO LINKER
(MLINK)

(1) Operation
According to the specification in a link control file created
beforehand, the macro linker creates a link list file and ROM-format
file for creating a desired macro cassette.
*1
*2
A:\> MLINK file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21/15A/15B)
A:\> MLINK15I file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 15iA)

Link control File

Link
Control

ROM Format File

ROM
File

MLINK
MLINK15I

(xx.LNK)

(xx.ROM)

Object File

Link List File(xx.MAP)

Object
Program

MACRO LINKER
prog.
1
O0001
2
O0002

(xx.REL)

Size.
00100H
00200H

Macro
Library
file
(xx.MEX)

*1 file-spec
This specifies a link control file created in a specified format
beforehand. The extension of a link control file name must be
.LNK.
*2 [parameters]
This specifies link conditions.
NR : Outputs no ROM-format file. If this parameter is
omitted, a ROM-format file with the extension .ROM is
output.
NL : Outputs no link list file. If this parameter is omitted, a
link list file with the extension .MAP is output.
Fm : Specifies the destination to which a link list file is output.
See item (4).
Fr : Specifies the destination to which a ROM-format file is
output

17

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

(2) Link control file


The link control file specifies a library file name, compile
parameters, and object file names subject to linkage. As with a source
file, a link control file must be created in MS-DOS text file format.
At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .LNK.
In a link control file, a library file name, compile parameters, and
object file names subject to linkage are defined using keywords. A
comment line can be provided by using /:.
Keyword)
CNC=
CNC2=
CNC3=
P9999=
FILE=

:
:
:
:
:

1st library file name for each CNC model


See Appendix
2nd library file name for each CNC model L for details.
3rd library file name for each CNC model
Compile parameters 9000 to 9059
Object file (Multiple object files can be specified with
each name delimited by a comma.)
HFILE= : Intel 32-bit hexadecimal file (Multiple object files can
be specified with each name delimited by a comma.)
SYSTEM= : pathname (Series 16i/18i/21i/15i)
SYSTEM value

Specified path

MPATH1

First path of M series

MPATH2

Second path of M series

TPATH1

First path of T series

TPATH2

Second path of T series

LPATH1

First path of loader

* MPATH1 is fixed
for series 15iA

Example)
/:
/: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE (SAMPLE)
/:
/:
FOR F16MB
CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F16MB_07.MEX
/:
P9000=00010000
P9010=100
P9037=5
P9038=8000
/:
JIKKOU-MACRO
FILE=ABC,DEF
FILE=XYZ,UVW
/:
TAIWA-MACRO
FILE=SSS

The example above is for Series 16MB. The compile parameters (Nos. 9000.
9010, 9037, and 9038) are set, and the object files (ABC.REF. DEF.REL,
XYZ.REL, UVW.REL, and SSS.REL) are linked.

The specification of (=0) is assumed for those compile parameters that are
not specified in the link control file.
A link control file is used also as a selective compile control file by the
macro compiler, as described in item (1) in Section 4.1. This function is
useful in compiling all programs to be linked.
A:\> MCOMP0 @ABS
compiles all files specified in the link
control file (file name: ABC.LNK).
18

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

(3) Link list file


The link list file is output by the linker, and a library name, compile
parameters, compile program list and size information, erroneous
program numbers, error codes, ROM-format file size information and
so forth are listed.
The name of a link list file is the same as the link control file name,
except that the extension .MAP is assigned to the link list file name.
For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS
command.
(4) Specifying the destinations to which the macro linker outputs
files
The directory of the destinations to which the macro linker outputs
files can be specified as desired according to linking conditions.
NOTE
This function is effective only for FAPT MACRO Compiler
Version 02.1 and later versions.
Fm : Specifies a destination to which a link list file is output.
Fr : Specifies a destination to which a ROM-format file is output.
Example: Generating SAMPL.MAP to directory B:\MAP and
SAMPL.ROM to directory C:\ROM
MLINK SAMPL -FmB:\MAP -FrC:\ROM

(5) Checking the size of ROM format file (Exclusive for Series
16-B/C, 18-B/C, 21-B, 16iA/B, 18iA/B, 21iA/B, 0iA and
15iA) at linking macro
A ROM format file that is created by linking (MLINK) is checked for
its size whether it is overflown or not. The size of ROM format file
is set by compile parameter No. 9000 and 9001 (No.8500 for
series15iA).
If a prepared ROM format file may exceed the size that was set by
compile parameter 9000 (No.8500 for series15i) and 9001 as a result
of linking, an error is produced when the macro linker is executed.
ERROR : ROM size over
Bit No.
Address
Compile
parameter

9000
Address

Compile
parameter

#7

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

9001

#0

#0

M4MB

M4MB

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

4.0MB

3.0MB

2.0MB

1.0MB

512KB

256KB

128KB

19

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

NOTE
1 For the 21-TB (Controller A), always specify 128 KB.
2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be
specified.
3 For the 21-MB or 21-TB (Controller B), no more than 1.0 MB
can be specified.
4 For the 0iA, no more than 512 KB can be specified.
D Series 15iA
Bit No.
Address
Compile
parameter

#7

#6

8500

#5
R10

R10

R05

1.0MB
512KB

1
0

0
1

256KB

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

R05

NOTE
For the Series 15iA, only the combinations given in the
table above are possible.
(6) Error messages
1) When the Series 16i/18i/21iA Macro library is linked using a
macro linker (MLINK.EXE) of MACRO COMPILER version
03.2 or earlier, the following error will occur:
ERROR:

Executer#1 is not specified

2) When the SYSTEM keyword is not specified, the following error


will occur:
ERROR:

20

Can not find SYSTEM define

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.3
ROMFORMAT FILE
TRANSMITTER (CNC)
(FOR Series
16/18/20/21TA)

A linked ROM-format file can be transferred to CNC memory via a


RS-232-C line, and whether the created ROM-format file operates
correctly can be checked using the macro executor RAM operation
function of the CNC system.
NOTE
The Series 0iA or Series 21B does not support this
function.
(1) Operation
After placing the CNC system in the macro executor receive ready
state, a linked ROM-format file is transferred with the following
command:
A:\> MTRNSC file-spec parameters -F -S

*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
CNC model

Number of address bits

Addressing

Series 16

32

00800000

Series 18

24

800000

Series 20

24

980000

Series 21-TA

24

3A0000

F : Overwriting loader command (See item (3).)


S : Not required in the Series 16/18A.
Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is transferred to Series 16-A.
A:\> MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000

(2) RS-232-C interface


For transfer, the RS-232-C serial interface channel at standard port
No. 0 is used. Before a RS-232C interface can be used, it must be
set and initialized according to the conditions below.
Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system
Data length : 7 bits
Parity
: Enable/even parity
Stop bit
: Value set with the connected CNC system
Xon/off control applied
For detailed information, see Chapter 6.
(3) Overwriting loader command effective
Only a user macro program can be transferred (execution of the
overwriting loader function ) by specifying the transfer parameter.
First all the files are transferred once, then only the changed user
macro program is transferred. This enables the macro program to be
debugged.
(This function is only effective for FAPT MACRO Compiler Version
02.1 and later versions.)
Example)
MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F

F : Overwriting loader command


When this command is specified, only the macro program (P-code
program) is transferred from the ROM-format file; execution control
software (executor) is not transferred.
21

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

a) Activate the P-code loader function in the initialization loader


function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701
= 0) to transfer all files from the personal computer.
MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000

b) Debug the macro program.


c) If an error is found, correct the macro program and compile or
link the macro program to create the ROM-format file again.
d) Activate the P-code loader function in the overwriting loader
function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701
= 1). Specifying -F transfers the macro program from the
personal computer.
MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F

Repeat steps b), c), and d) to debug the macro program.


If the library to be linked has been modified according to the software
revision, the above procedure must be followed again from step a),
transferring all files.

22

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.4
ROMFORMAT FILE
TRANSMITTER
(FANUC PMC
WRITER/FANUC FA
WRITER)
(FOR Series 0, 15A,
16A, 18A)

(1) Operation
A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC PMC
Writer or FANUC FA Writer via a RS-232-C line, and is written to
a macro ROM and verified.
A:\> MROMWT file-spec parameters

Write or write/verification
A:\> MROMVF file-spec parameters

Verification
*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
-K1xx : Cassette type (1)
-K2xx : Cassette type (2)
-IDxxxx: ID code
-VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWT only).
-VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWT only).
-Pxx : Sets pulse width (with MROMWT only).
-VF
: Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with
MROMWT only).
For detailed information, see Appendix C.
Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0 512K-byte
ROM cassette, then is verified.
A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM K110 K223 ID50B2
VCC0 VP64 -P01 -VF

(2) RS-232-C interface


For detailed information, see Chapter 6.

23

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.5
SERIAL INTERFACE
UTILITY
4.5.1
Macro Program Input

(1) Operation
A macro program is read from the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C
line, then is stored in an MS-DOS text file for the macro compiler.
A macro program is transferred from the CNC/SYSTEM P after the
command below is entered and the personal computer is placed in
receive ready state.
A:\> MPLOADA file-spec

1* file-spec
This specifies the name of a text file for storing a macro program.
Example: A macro program is read to
A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC.
A:\> MPLOADA A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC

CAUTION
Select the ISO code as output code when transferring a
macro program from the CNC/SYSTEM P.

4.5.2
Macro Program Output

(1) Operation
A macro program output with the parameter -L3 described in Section
4.1 can be output to the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line. After
the CNC/SYSTEM P is placed in program read ready state, a macro
program is transferred by the command below.
A:\> MPOUT file-spec parameters

*1 file-spec
This specifies a macro program file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
Fffff : Outputs fields (null code) before and after a macro
program. By ffff, specify the number of fields to be
output.
CR

: Specifies the output format of the EOB (;).


When -CR is omitted:The EOB (;) is converted to
LF(0AH)/CR(0DH)/CR(0DH).
When -CR is specified:The EOB (;) is converted to
LF(0AH).

(2) RS-232-C interface


For detailed information, see Chapter 6.

24

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.6
ROMFORMAT FILE
TRANSMITTER
(FANUC FA WRITER,
GPIB INTERFACE)
(FOR Series 0, 15A,
16A, 18A)

(1) Operation
A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA Writer via
a GP-IB interface, and is written to a macro cassette and verified.
Since a linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA
Writer via a GP-IN interface, the file can be written to a macro cassette
and verified at higher speed than when the file is transferred via a
RS-232-C line (Section 4.4).
A:\> MROMWTG file-spec parameters

Write or write/verification
A:\> MROMVFG file-spec parameters

Verification
*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
-K1xx : Cassette type (1)
-K2xx : Cassette type (2)
-IDxxxx : ID code
-VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWTG only).
-VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWTG only).
-Pxx

: Sets pulse width (with MROMWTG only).

-VF

: Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with


MROMWTG only).

For detailed information, see Appendix C.


Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0
512K-byte ROM cassette, then is verified.
A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223
-ID50B2 -VCC0 -VP64 -P01 -VF

(2) GP-IB interface


For detailed information, see Chapter 7.

25

4. FUNCTIONS

B66102E/10

4.7
CONVERSION TO A
MEMORY CARD
FORMAT (MMCARD)
(THIS FUNCTION IS
USED IN THE Series
15B/16B/16C/18B
/18C/20/21B/
16iA/18iA/21iA/
16iB/18iB/21iB/
0iA.)

(1) Operation
Convert a ROM-format file created by the macro linker (MLINK) to
the memory-card format file which can be loaded from the memory
card using the boot function of the Series 15-B/16-B/20.
A:\> MMCARD file-spec
(Series 16B/16C/18B/18C/20/21-B/
16iA/16iB/18iA/18iB/21iA/21iB)
A:\> MMCARD15 filespec (Series 15B)

*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format File to be converted without
extension. The name of MEM-format file is the same as
ROM-format File name with the extension .MEM.
Example: A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.ROM is
converted into
A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.MEM.
A:\> MMCARD15
A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL

Series 16-B/16C/18-B/
18C/20/21-B/
16iA/16iB/18iA/
18iB/21iA/21iB
Source File

MCOMP0

Object File

Macro
Program
(xxx.SRC)

MCOMP15

Object
Program
(xxx.REL)

(Sereis 15-B)
MCOMP15I
Series 15B/16B/16C/
18B/18C/20/21-B/
16iA/16iB/18iA/
18iB/21iA/21iB

(Sereis 15iA)
Link Control File

MLINK

Link
Control
(xxx.LNK)

ROM File
(xxx.ROM)

MLINK15I
(Sereis 15iA)

Macro Library File


Macro
Library
(xxx.MEX)

MMCARD

MMCARD15

MMCARD15I

Series 16-B/16C/18-B/
18C/20/21-B/
16iA/16iB/18iA/
18iB/21iA/21iB/
0iA

(Sereis 15-B)

(Sereis 15iA)

To memory card
COPY A:xxx.MEM F:
(F: Memory card device number)

Memory Card File


Memory
Card File
(xxx.MEM)

Memory Card

26

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B66102E/10

SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

A macro program is to be created according the rule described below.


(1) A macro program must start with address O. Address % must be
specified at the end of the file. Multiple programs can be coded in a
single file. At this time, the start of each program can be identified
by address O. Data after address %, if any, is ignored. When multiple
programs are coded, address % must be coded at the end.
O0001 #101=1;
G00 X#101;
:
O0002 G243 X0 YX (ABS);
#500=#501+#502;
:
%

(2) One line can contain only one block. The end of block (EOB) is
represented by a semicolon (;). All data after a semicolon on a line
is regarded as a comment.
#100=#101; COMMENT
G00 X123. Y234. ; G01 ; =>
G01 ; after ; is regarded as comment.
(3) All data after /: is regarded as a comment. A line starting with /* is
regarded as a comment line; such a line is not compiled.
/: comment

=> Compiler ignores this line as comment line.

/: comment
/:
O0001 ;
/: comment

=> Compiler ignores this line as comment line.

G00 ...;
;/: comment

=> Blank block containing only ; is created.

M99;
%

(4) Programming using symbolic names


A symbolic name can be defined for a variable, expression, or
character string to allow programming using symbolic names. A
symbolic name can be defined as described below.

27

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B66102E/10

Symbolic name definition


@xxxx

yyyyyy

xxxx: Symbolic name


(String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an
alphabetic character)
Version of the compiler

Version 1.4 or previous versions

Version 2.1 or subsequent versions

32

Maximum number of
characters

yyyyyy: Definition character string (not longer than 80 characters)


After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program
is replaced by the corresponding definition character string.
Example)
@COUNT1 #100
@ON
=1
@OFF
=0
@CURSOR #8505
@RETURN M99
/:
O0001 ;
CURSOR ON ;
COUNT1 = COUNT1+1 ;
RETURN ;

==>> O0001 ;
#8505 =1 ;
#100 = #100+1 ;
M99 ;

(5) Symbolic name for sequence number


A symbolic name can be assigned to a sequence number as described
below. In (4) above, a symbolic name is just used for a definition
character string. On the other hand, a symbolic name for a sequence
number is regarded as a sequence number when it is coded at the start
of a block, and is regarded as a jump (GOTO) destination number
when it is coded at a position other than the start of a block.
Definition of symbolic name for sequence number
>xxxx 9999

xxxx: Symbolic name for sequence number


(String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic
character)
Version of the compiler
Maximum number of
characters

Version 1.4 or
previous versions

Version 2.1 or
subsequent versions

32

9999: Number (not longer than four digits)


After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program
is replaced by the corresponding sequence number.

28

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B66102E/10

Example)
@COUNT1 #100
>JUMP1 100
>SKIP
200
/:
O0002 ;
==>
GOTO JUMP1 ;
IF[COUNT1 LE 0]GOTO SKIP ;
SKIP ;
JUMP1 M99 ;

O0002 ;
GOTO 100 ;
IF[#100 LE 0]GOTO 200 ;
N200 ;
N100 M99 ;

(6) Automatic conversion of hiragana and kanji codes


Hiragana and kanji, when coded in quotation marks and
parentheses as (
), can be auto-matically converted to internal
macro compiler codes by coding.
) ==> (:3929 3671 3872 3439
(
2437 245E 2439:)

Kanji and hiragana must be coded using full-size characters, and


alphanumeric characters, spaces, special symbols must be coded
using half-size characters.
Specifying a compiling condition as -FS0 enables the characters
usable in the Series 0 to be checked. When -FS0 is specified, the
characters unusable in the Series 0 cause a compiling error.
(This specification is only effective for FAPT MACRO Compiler
Version 02.1 and later versions.)
MCOMP0 TEST -FS0

(7) Reference to external file ($INCLUDE control statement)


By using the $INCLUDE control statement, a program, symbol
definition, and so forth contained in a separate file can be referenced.
With this function, definitions and processing common to multiple
programs can be specified in a separate file so that each program file
can reference those definitions and processing.
Example)
Program file
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
/:
O0003 ;
==> O0003 ;
TAIWAP1 =5 ;
#8500 =5 ;
RETURN ;
M99 ;
Include file (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
/:
@TAIWAP1 #8500
@RETURN M99
/:

29

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B66102E/10

(8) Array variable coding


Variables can be used as a one-dimensional array by using a simple
coding method.
Coding method
#999<expression>
999: Number of first variable in array
By this coding method, variables can be referenced or written to as
array data with an index indicated by the expression and starting with
the variable specified in 999.
#100<#101> is equivalent to #[100+#101].
(9) Reference list page eject control ($EJECT control statement)
By using the $EJECT control statement, reference list page eject
operation can be freely controlled.
Example)
Program file
/:
$EJECT
Advances reference list page.
/:
O0003 ;
D
D

(10)Enhancement of IF and WHILE statements


The IF and WHILE statements have been enhanced.
(a) Determination of an operation result
Only an operation expression can be specified as the condition of
the IF or WHILE statement. The execution of the IF or WHILE
statement is controlled depending on whether the operation result
is equal to 0.
Format:
WHILE[operation-expression] DOx ;
ENDx ;
IF[operation-expression] GOTO xxx ;
IF[operation-expression] THEN<Macro statement>;

Example)
The left macro instructions are equivalent to the right macro
instructions.
WHILE[#100]DO1; WHILE[#100 NE 0]DO1;
D

END1;

END1;

IF[#100+#101]GOTO123; IF[[#100+#101]NE 0 ]GOTO123;


IF[SIN[#1]]THEN #1=0; IF [SIN[#1] NE 0] THEN #1=0 ;

(b) Logical operations, AND and OR


Multiple conditions can be specified in an IF statement. The
conditions ANDed or ORed control the execution of the IF
statement.
Format :
IF[<condition>&&<condition>]GOTO xxx;
IF[<condition>||<condition>]THEN<MACRO statement> ;

An AND is represented with an && sign and OR with an sign.


Up to three ANDs or ORs can be specified in a single IF
statement. However, an AND and OR must not be specified
together in a single IF statement.
30

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B66102E/10

IF[<condition>&&<condition>&&<condition>&&
<condition>] THEN<MACRO stmnt>;
IF[<condition>||<condition>||<condition>||
<condition>]GOTO xxx;
IF[<condition>&&<condition>||<condition>]
GOTO xxx ;

OK
OK
NG

Example)
IF[#100 EQ 1 && #101 GT 0] GOTO 100 ;
IF[#100 E Q1 ||#101 NE 1 || #102 GT 10 ] THEN #102=1 ;

(c) IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF
The syntax of an IF statement has been enhanced. Structured
programming is possible using IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF.
The following shows the formats of syntactically valid IF
statements.
 IF[...]GOTO 999 ;
 IF[...]THEN Macro-st ;
 IF[...]THEN Macro-st; *Macro-st:
ELSE Macro-st; Macro statement
 IF[...]THEN ;
Statement ;
D

*Statement:

Macro or NC statement

ENDIF ;
 IF[...]THEN ;
Statement ;
D
D

ELSE ;
Statement ;
D
D

ENDIF ;

a) When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the macro


statement can be specified immediately after THEN/ELSE as
shown in  and .
IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1;
ELSE #101 = 2;

b) When an instruction to be executed is an NC statement or


multiple instructions to be executed, the NC statement or
multiple instructions must be specified between the
THEN/ELSE line and ENDIF line as shown in  and .
IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN ;
GO1 X100 Y200 ;
ENDIF ;

When instructions with THEN and ELSE must be executed as


shown in , the IF statement can be specified by combining the
formats in a) and b).
31

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B66102E/10

IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1;


ELSE ;
#101 = 2 ;
GOO X#103 ;
ENDIF ;

Up to three levels of nesting of the IF statement are allowed.


IF [...] THEN ;
IF [...] THEN ;
Statement ;



ELSE ;
IF [...] THEN ;
Statement ;
ENDIF ;
ENDIF ;
Statement ;



ELSE ;
Statement ;



ENDIF ;

CAUTION
When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the
macro statement can be specified immediately after
THEN/ELSE. In this case, no ENDIF statement is usually
required. However, an ENDIF statement is required when
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or
ENDIF of the previous nesting as shown below:
IF [...] THEN ;
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
ELSE ;

ENDIF ; The ENDIF line is required


because IF [...] THEN
Macro-st ; is specified just
before ELSE or ENDIF of
the previous nesting.

IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;


IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
ENDIF ;

32

ENDIF ; The ENDIF line is required


because IF [...] THEN
Macro-st ; is specified just
before ELSE or ENDIF of
the previous nesting.

6. RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING

B66102E/10

RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING

To transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC system or FANUC


PMC-Writer/FA-Writer for writing to ROM/verification or transfer a
macro program, the RS-232-C interface is controlled using the DOS
function call (21H) auxiliary I/O device (AUX) for MS-DOS. By device
specification with CONFIG.SYS, enable RS-232-C ports to be controlled
with the auxiliary I/O device (AUX).
The RS-232-C interface must be set or initialized beforehand according
to the conditions described below. If a transfer operation is once
performed via a RS-232-C interface, and the RS-232-C is used again with
the same or another command, the RS-232-C interface must be
initialized.
Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system
Data length : 7 bits
Parity
: Enable/even parity
Stop bit
: Value set with the connected CNC system
Xon/off control
System installation processing creates, for use by the user, a standard
batch file for RS-232-C interface initialization under the directory
\MCOMP\TOOL.

(1) For Fujitsu FMR Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSFMR.BAT)


Contents : SETUP RSC R0,4800,BITS-7,
PARITY-EVEN.STOP-2,XON
(2) For NEC PC98 Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPC98.BAT)
Contents : SPEED RS232-0 4800 BITS-7 PARITY-EVEN
STOP-2 XON
(3) For IBM PC-AT Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPCAT.BAT)
Contents : MODE COM1:48,E,7,2

33

7. GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING


(FOR Series 0, 15A, 16A, 18A)

B66102E/10

GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING


(FOR Series 0, 15-A, 16-A, 18-A)

The GP-IB interface performs interface processing by using a GP-IB


BIOS driver provided by each personal computer supplier. The user is to
prepare a GP-IB interface board for a personal computer model to use, and
to initialize the board according to the operators manual before usage.
(1) GP-IB interface board
Use the GP-IB interface boards listed below.
(a) NEC PC98 Series
NEC GP-IB (IEEE-488) interface board (PC-9801-29N)
(b) IBM PC-AT Series
NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS
VAT-GPIB Interface & NI-488.2 MS-DOS/NI-488.2 WindowGs
SoftwareW
FD3/FD5 NO.776207-1
(2) GP-IB interface board setting
(a) Set the GP-IB address to 1E (hexadecimal).
When an address other than 1E is to be used for some reason, the
same address must be set in the parameter -MAxx of the
ROM-format
file
transmitter
command
(MROMWTG/MROMVFG).
When GP-IB address OF is set:
A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223 -ID40B0 -MA0F

(b) Select the master mode rather than the slave mode.
The master mode must be selected because the GP-IB control
function is performed on the personal computer.
(c) Others
For other settings, refer to the operators manual of each GP-IB
board.
(3) FANUC FA Writer setting
(a) Set the GP-IB address to 00 (hexadecimal).
The address is factory-set to 00.
(b) Set the transfer block size to 2058 bytes.
The block size is factory-set to 256 bytes.
(4) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer
(a) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer to a GPIB
interface.
To switch the interface, turn on the power to the FANUC FA
Writer while pressing the FUNCTION key. The FANUC FA
Writer then enters the GPIB interface mode.

34

8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE

B66102E/10

SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE

When the system is installed, a system common symbol definition file is


stored under the directory \MCOMP\TOOL. For macro program
creation, the user should make full use of the symbolic names defined in
the file for variables commonly used with the system.
System common symbol definition file
File name: \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
To use this file, use the external file reference function described in Item
(7) in Chapter 5. For a usage example, see Appendix D.
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF

For information about the defined symbols, see Appendix A.

35

9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST

B66102E/10

HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST

A source program coded using symbolic macro programs is converted by


the macro compiler to a program in custom macro format for compile
processing. The macro compiler outputs two types of list files: one for
a reference list, and the other for a compile list.
Since conversion processing is performed, the comment lines and symbol
definition lines in a source program are not listed. For this reason, a
reference list and compile list output two types of line numbers to identify
a compile error in a source program.
(1) Reference list
A source program coded using symbolic macro programs, cross
reference data of used symbols, error messages from conversion
processing, and so forth are output in a reference list.
Line number S-Line : Source program line number
Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion
(2) Compile list
A program converted to a program in custom macro format, cross
reference data of used variables, compile error messages, and so forth
are output in a compile list.
Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion
Line number P-Line : Line number for each program number
In the example below, the compile list has an error on G-Line 0002; the
same G-Line 0002 in the reference list and the line 4 in the source program
have this error.
Example)
*Reference list (xxx.REF)
---------- Program -------------------------

S-Line
1
2
3
4
5
6

G-Line

0001
0002
0003
0004

@ABC #100
/:
O1000 ;
ABD = 0 ;
M99 ;
%

*Compile list (xxx.LST)


---------- program O1000 ------------------G-Line P-Line
0001
1
O1000;
0002
2
ABD=0;
error #140C -----------^
***** ERROR : 140C Illegal function code.
0003
3
M99;
0004
4
%

36

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

D SYSTEM. DEF for series 0/16/18/20/21


$NOLIST
/:
/:
**************************************************************
/:
* System common symbol define
*
/:
*
for series 0/16/18/20/21.
(V01.03 1999.07.21)
*
/:
**************************************************************
/:
/:
/:
No.01 Control instruction code.
/:
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CALL
M98P
/: Sub program call.
@RETURN
M99
/: Return to main program.
@RETURNP
M99P
/: Return to main program with sequence No.
/:
@DISPLAY
G243
/: Character display.
@FORM
F
/:
Format.
@DATA
D
/:
Data.
@NSUP
Z0
/:
No Zero suppress.
@ZSUP
Z1
/:
Zero suppress.
/:
@ELASE
G202
/: CRT erase.
@ELASEGR
G202P1 /:
Graphic erase.
@ELASECH
G202P2 /:
Charactor erase.
@ELASEAL
G202P3 /:
Graphic & Character erase.
/:
@RECTNG
G204
/: Rectangle display.
/:
@GRPNT
G206
/: Graphic paint out.
/:
@COLOR
G240
/: Display color select.
@BLACK
G240P0 /:
Black.
@RED
G240P1 /:
Red.
@GREEN
G240P2 /:
Green.
@YELLOW
G240P3 /:
Yellow.
@BLUE
G240P4 /:
Blue.
@PERPLE
G240P5 /:
Perple.
@SKYBL
G240P6 /:
Skyblue.
@WHITE
G240P7 /:
White.
@REDR
G240P1 /:
Reverse Red.
@GREENR
G240P2 /:
Reverse Green.
@YELLOWR
G240P3 /:
Reverse Yellow.
@BLUER
G240P4 /:
Reverse Blue.
@PERPLER
G240P5 /:
Reverse Perple.
@SKYBLR
G240P6 /:
Reverse Skyblue.
@WHITER
G240P7 /:
Reverse White.
/:
@BON
L1
/:
Blink ON
@BOF
L0
/:
Blink OFF

39

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)
/:
@DRLINEK
@DRSTART
@DRLINE
@DRCW
@DRCCW

G244
G242
G01
G02
G03

/: Graphic Line kind select.


/:
Draw start point.
/:
Linear line display.
/:
Circle display(CW).
/:
Circle display(CCW).

@GRCSR

G249

/: Graphic cursor.

/:
/:
@PMCDATA
G310
@1BYTE
L1
@2BYTE
L2
@4BYTE
L4

/: PMC relay/data read and write.


1 BYTE
/:
/:
2 BYTE
/:
4 BYTE

/:
@TRSVR
G315
/: Pcode variable transfer.
@TRSVRNML G315P001/:
normal transfer.
@TRSVRUPT G315P002/:
up transfer.
@TRSVRDWT G315P003/:
down transfer.
@TRSVRARG G315P101/:
transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRUPA G315P102/:
up transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRDWA G315P103/:
down transfer to arangement.
/:
@PAMAKE
@PADELET
@PACNDNS
@PAREAD
@PAWRITE
@PABDELT
@PACREAD
@PACWRIT

G320
G321
G322
G325
G326
G327
G328
G329

/: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make)


(Prog. delete)
/:
/:
(Prog. condense)
/:
(Block read)
/:
(Block write)
/:
(Block delete)
/:
(Character block read)
/:
(Character block write)

@RSOPEN
@RSCLOSE
@RSRECV
@RSSEND
@RSVARRD
@RSVARWT
@RSFUNC

G330
G331
G335
G336
G337
G338
G339

/: RS232C open.
/:
close.
/:
receive 1ch.
/:
Data send.
Variable data read.
/:
/:
Variable data write.
/:
FANUC cassettee control.

@PMAFEED
@PMACUT
@PMADWLL
@PMAREFC
@PMAMSCL
@PMASNRD
@PMASNWT

G340
G341
G344
G345
G346
G348
G349

/: PMC AXIS feed.


/:
cutting.
/:
dwell.
/:
reference position return.
/:
miscellaneous function.
/:
signal read.
/:
signal write.

/:

/:

/:
/:
/:
/:

No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define.


~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CMACRO1
#8500
/: Conversation MACRO 1 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP1
#8500
@CMACRO2
#8550
/: Conversation MACRO 2 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP2
#8550
@CMACRO3
#8551
/: Conversation MACRO 3 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP3
#8551

/:

40

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@KEYCONT
#8502
@NOREAD
#8502=0
@NUMREAD
#8502=1
@ADRREAD
#8502=2
@ASCREAD
#8502=3

/: MDIKEY IN CONTROL.
/:
No Data read.
/:
Numeric Data read.
/:
Address+Numeric Data read.
/:
ASCII Data read.

@KEYCODE
@PAGEDW
@PAGEUP
@CURDW
@CURUP
@ALTER
@INSRT
@DELET
@INPUT
@START
@RESET
@CURRT
@CURLF
@PINPUT

#8501
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
18
19
28

/: MDIKEY IN CODE.
/:
Page Down
KEY pushed.
/:
Page Up
/:
Cursor Down
Cursor Up
/:
/:
Alter
/:
Insert
/:
Delete
/:
Input
/:
Start/Output
/:
Reset
/:
Cursor Right
/:
Cursor Left
/:
Input add decimal point

@SFTLF
@SFT1
@SFT2
@SFT3
@SFT4
@SFT5
@SFTRT

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft

key
key
key
key
key
key
key

left
1
2
3
4
5
right

(9CRT)
(9CRT)
(9CRT)
(9CRT)
(9CRT)
(9CRT)
(9CRT)

@SFTFLF
@SFTF1
@SFTF2
@SFTF3
@SFTF4
@SFTF5
@SFTF6
@SFTF7
@SFTF8
@SFTF9
@SFTF10
@SFTFRT

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft
Soft

key
key
key
key
key
key
key
key
key
key
key
key

left
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
right

(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)
(14CRT)

/:

/:

/:

@KEYDATA
@KEYADRS
@KEYARRY

#8503
#8504
#8552

/: MDIKEY IN DATA.
/: MDIKEY IN ADDRESS.
/: MDIKEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.

@CURSOR
@CURSORX
@CURSORY

#8505
#8506
#8507

/: CURSOR DISPLAY CONTROL.


/: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (X).
/: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (Y).

@CHRPROG
@CRTFUNC

#8509
#8510

/: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No.


/: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.

@ARRY2BS
@ARRY3BS
@ARRY1CT
@ARRY2CT

#8512
#8513
#8516
#8517

/:
/:
/:
/:

/:

/:

/:
Array
Array
Array
Array

CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL

41

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@ARRYTOP

#8519

/: Array CONTORL (Top variable No.)

@TRNSDAT
@TRNS2BS
@TRNS3BS
@TRNS2TO
@TRNS3TO

#8511
#8512
#8513
#8514
#8515

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

Transfer
Transfer
Transfer
Transfer
Transfer

@PAPROGN
@PABLOKN
@PAVARNO
@PAPNTVN
@PAERROR

#8520
#8521
#8522
#8523
#8529

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

CNC
CNC
CNC
CNC
CNC

@PABGEDT
@PAPGCNT
@PAFPMEM

#8526
#8527
#8528

/: BGedit status.
/: Program count.
/: Free program memory.

@RSERROR

#8539

/: RS232C INTERFACE

@MDIKEYI

#8549

/: MDI Key image

@CUTTIME
@CUTLENG

#8553
#8554

/: Cutting Time.
/: Cutting length.

@HELPPNM
@HELPRST

#8555
#8556

/: Users HELP screen Prog. Num.


/: Users HELP return status.

@KEYLINX
@KEYLINY
@KEYINUM
@KEYPRPT
@KEYCLOR

#8561
#8562
#8563
#8564
#8565

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

@ITLCNTL
@ITLSTTS

#8600
#8601

/: Inter Lock control.


/: Skip signal movement direction.

@PMGSLCT

#8602

/: PMC AXIS select.

@PCDWKNO

#8610

/: Pcode Work No. search.

@TRQLTO1
@TRQLTO2
@TRQLTO3
@TRQLTO4
@TRQLTO5
@TRQLTO6
@TRQLTO7
@TRQLTO8

#8621
#8622
#8623
#8624
#8625
#8626
#8627
#8628

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS

@CNVTAD1
@CNVTAD2
@CNVTAD3
@CNVTAD4

#8631
#8632
#8633
#8634

/:
/:
/:
/:

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL

@MSKCLAX
@MSKCLTC

#8690
#8691

/: AXIS Macro call mask.


/: T code call mask.

/:
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL

/:
PROG.
PROG.
PROG.
PROG.
PROG.

ACCESS.
ACCESS.
ACCESS.
ACCESS.
ACCESS.

(PROGRAM No.)
(BLOCK
No.)
(DATA VAR. No.)
(POINT DATA VAR. No.)
(RETURN CODE)

/:

/:
(RETURN CODE)

/:
/:

/:

/:
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY

in line X potion.
in line Y potion.
input number.
in line prompt.
in line color.

/:

/:
(Gcode control)

/:
/:
1 limited torque override.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

/:
1 A/D converter.
2
3
4

/:

42

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

/:
@PMVSLCT
@PMVFLG1
@PMVCMD1
@PMVCSP1
@PMVLNG1
@PMVSTS1
@PMVFLG2
@PMVCMD2
@PMVCSP2
@PMVLNG2
@PMVSTS2
@PMVFLG3
@PMVCMD3
@PMVCSP3
@PMVLNG3
@PMVSTS3
@PMVFLG4
@PMVCMD4
@PMVCSP4
@PMVLNG4
@PMVSTS4

#8700
#8710
#8711
#8712
#8713
#8715
#8720
#8721
#8722
#8723
#8725
#8730
#8731
#8732
#8733
#8735
#8740
#8741
#8742
#8743
#8745

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

@WINDIDX
@WINDDAT

#8998
#8999

/: Window Index.
/: Window Data.

PMC AXIS select. (VARIABLE control)


PMC 1 control flag.
command.
cutting speed.
length.
status.
PMC 2 control flag.
command.
cutting speed.
length.
status.
PMC 3 control flag.
command.
cutting speed.
length.
status.
PMC 4 control flag.
command.
cutting speed.
length.
status.

/:

/:
/:
/:
/:

No.03 System Variable.


~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@EMPTY
#0
/: EMPTY.
@ENMTY
#0
/: EMPTY.
@ALARM
#3000
/: Alarm display.
@TIMER1
#3001
/: Msec Timer.
@TIMER2
#3002
/: Hour Timer.
@SBKCNT
#3003
/: Single blok/Auxilialy function control.
@FLDCNT
#3004
/: Feed hold/Over ride control.
@SETTING
#3005
/: Setting data.
@DATE
#3011
/: System date.
@TIME
#3012
/: System Time.
@PARTCNT
#3901
/: Part count.
@PARTRQT
#3902
/: Part request.
@MDLG01
#4001
/: Modal Gcode Group 1
@MDLG02
#4002
/: Modal Gcode Group 2
@MDLG03
#4003
/: Modal Gcode Group 3
@MDLG04
#4004
/: Modal Gcode Group 4
@MDLG05
#4005
/: Modal Gcode Group 5
@MDLG06
#4006
/: Modal Gcode Group 6
@MDLG07
#4007
/: Modal Gcode Group 7
@MDLG08
#4008
/: Modal Gcode Group 8
@MDLG09
#4009
/: Modal Gcode Group 9
@MDLG10
#4010
/: Modal Gcode Group 10
@MDLG11
#4011
/: Modal Gcode Group 11
@MDLG12
#4012
/: Modal Gcode Group 12
@MDLG13
#4013
/: Modal Gcode Group 13
@MDLG14
#4014
/: Modal Gcode Group 14
@MDLG15
#4015
/: Modal Gcode Group 15
@MDLG16
#4016
/: Modal Gcode Group 16

43

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@MDLG17
@MDLG18
@MDLG19
@MDLG20
@MDLG21
@MDLG22
@CORDF
@CORDM
@SEQNUM
@PRGNUM
@CORDS
@CORDT

#4017
#4018
#4019
#4020
#4021
#4022
#4109
#4113
#4114
#4115
#4119
#4120

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

@ABSIO1
@ABSIO2
@ABSIO3
@ABSIO4
@ABSIO5
@ABSIO6
@ABSIO7
@ABSIO8
@ABSMT1
@ABSMT2
@ABSMT3
@ABSMT4
@ABSMT5
@ABSMT6
@ABSMT7
@ABSMT8
@ABSOT1
@ABSOT2
@ABSOT3
@ABSOT4
@ABSOT5
@ABSOT6
@ABSOT7
@ABSOT8
@ABSKP1
@ABSKP2
@ABSKP3
@ABSKP4
@ABSKP5
@ABSKP6
@ABSKP7
@ABSKP8
@OFSEXW1
@OFSEXW2
@OFSEXW3
@OFSEXW4
@OFSEXW5
@OFSEXW6
@OFSEXW7
@OFSEXW8
@OFS54W1
@OFS54W2
@OFS54W3
@OFS54W4

#5001
#5002
#5003
#5004
#5005
#5006
#5007
#5008
#5021
#5022
#5023
#5024
#5025
#5026
#5027
#5028
#5041
#5042
#5043
#5044
#5045
#5046
#5047
#5048
#5061
#5062
#5063
#5064
#5065
#5066
#5067
#5068
#5201
#5202
#5203
#5204
#5205
#5206
#5207
#5208
#5221
#5222
#5223
#5224

/: Block end position. 1st


/:
2nd

Modal Gcode Group


Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
F cord
M cord
Sequece number
Program number
S cord
T cord

17
18
19
20
21
22

/:

/: Machine Position.

/: Current absolute position.

/: Skip cutting position.

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS

1 External workpiece reference offset.


2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 G54 workpiece reference offset.
2
3
4

44

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

@OFS54W5
@OFS54W6
@OFS54W7
@OFS54W8
@OFS55W1
@OFS55W2
@OFS55W3
@OFS55W4
@OFS55W5
@OFS55W6
@OFS55W7
@OFS55W8
@OFS56W1
@OFS56W2
@OFS56W3
@OFS56W4
@OFS56W5
@OFS56W6
@OFS56W7
@OFS56W8
@OFS57W1
@OFS57W2
@OFS57W3
@OFS57W4
@OFS57W5
@OFS57W6
@OFS57W7
@OFS57W8
@OFS58W1
@OFS58W2
@OFS58W3
@OFS58W4
@OFS58W5
@OFS58W6
@OFS58W7
@OFS58W8
@OFS59W1
@OFS59W2
@OFS59W3
@OFS59W4
@OFS59W5
@OFS59W6
@OFS59W7
@OFS59W8
/:
/:
/:
/:

#5225
#5226
#5227
#5228
#5241
#5242
#5243
#5244
#5245
#5246
#5247
#5248
#5261
#5262
#5263
#5264
#5265
#5266
#5267
#5268
#5281
#5282
#5283
#5284
#5285
#5286
#5287
#5288
#5301
#5302
#5303
#5304
#5305
#5306
#5307
#5308
#5321
#5322
#5323
#5324
#5325
#5326
#5327
#5328

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS

5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

G55 workpiece reference offset.

G56 workpiece reference offset.

G57 workpiece reference offset.

G58 workpiece reference offset.

G59 workpiece reference offset.

No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE.


~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ON
=1
@OFF
=0

/:
$LIST

45

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

B66102E/10

D SYSTEM. DEF for series 15i0/16/18/20/21 (Possible to use this symbol definition evenby series 15B)
$NOLIST
/:
/:
*************************************************************
/:
* System common symbol define.
*
*
for series15i (V01.01 1999.07.21) *
/:
/:
*************************************************************
/:
/:
/:
No.01 Control instruction code.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
/:
@CALL
M98P
/: Sub program call.
@RETURN
M99
/: Return to main program.
@RETURNP
M99P
/: Return to main program with sequence No.
/:
@ELASE
G202
/: CRT erase.
Graphic erase.
@ELASEGR
G202P1 /:
@ELASECH
G202P2 /:
Charactor erase.
@ELASEAL
G202P3 /:
Graphic & Character erase.
/:
@COLOR
G240
/: Display color select.
Black.
@BLACK
G240P0 /:
@RED
G240P1 /:
Red.
@GREEN
G240P2 /:
Green.
Yellow.
@YELLOW
G240P3 /:
@BLUE
G240P4 /:
Blue.
@PERPLE
G240P5 /:
Perple.
Skyblue.
@SKYBL
G240P6 /:
@WHITE
G240P7 /:
White.
@REDR
G240P1 /:
Reverse Red.
Reverse Green.
@GREENR
G240P2 /:
@YELLOWR
G240P3 /:
Reverse Yellow.
Reverse Blue.
@BLUER
G240P4 /:
@PERPLER
G240P5 /:
Reverse Perple.
@SKYBLR
G240P6 /:
Reverse Skyblue.
Reverse White.
@WHITER
G240P7 /:
/:
@BON
L1
/:
Blink ON
Blink OFF
@BOF
L0
/:
/:
@ABSMOD
G390 /: Absolute mode
@INCMOD
G391 /: Incremental mode
/:
@CURSOR
G230
/: Cursor display control.
@CLEN
L
/:
cirsor length
/:
@DISPLAY
G243
/: Character display.
@FORM
F
/:
Format.
@DATA
D
/:
Data.
No Zero suppress.
@NSUP
Z0
/:
@ZSUP
Z1
/:
Zero suppress.
/:
@KEYPRPT
G280
/: Prompt display.
/:
@RECTNG
G204
/: Rectangle display.
/:
@DRLINEK
G244
/: Graphic Line kind select.

46

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

@DRSTART
@DRLINE
@DRCW
@DRCCW

G242
G301
G302
G303

/:
/:
/:
/:

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

Draw start point.


Linear line display.
Circle display(CW).
Circle display(CCW).

/:
@PMCDATA
G310
@1BYTE
L1
@2BYTE
L2
@4BYTE
L4

/: PMC relay/data read and write.


/:
1 BYTE
/:
2 BYTE
/:
4 BYTE

/:
@TRSVR
G315
/: Pcode variable transfer.
@TRSVRNML G315P001/:
normal transfer.
@TRSVRUPT G315P002/:
up transfer.
@TRSVRDWT G315P003/:
down transfer.
@TRSVRARG G315P101/:
transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRUPA G315P102/:
up transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRDWA G315P103/:
down transfer to arangement.
/:
@PAMAKE
@PADELET
@PAREAD
@PAWRITE
@PABDELT
@PACREAD
@PACWRIT

G370
G371
G375
G376
G377
G328
G329

/: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make)


/:
(Prog. delete)
/:
(Block read)
/:
(Block write)
/:
(Block delete)
(Character block read)
/:
/:
(Character block write)

@RSOPEN
@RSCLOSE
@RSRECV
@RSSEND
@RSVARRD
@RSVARWT
@RSFUNC

G330
G331
G335
G336
G337
G338
G339

/: RS232C open.
/:
close.
/:
receive 1ch.
/:
Data send.
/:
Variable data read.
/:
Variable data write.
/:
FANUC cassettee control.

@PMAFEED
@PMACUT
@PMADWLL
@PMAREFC
@PMAMSCL
@PMASNRD
@PMASNWT

G340
G341
G344
G345
G346
G348
G349

/: PMC AXIS feed.


cutting.
/:
/:
dwell.
/:
reference position return.
/:
miscellaneous function.
/:
signal read.
/:
signal write.

/:

/:

/:
/:
/:
/:

No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define.


~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CMACRO1
#8500
/: Conversation MACRO 1 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@AMACRO1
#8600
/: Auxliary MACRO1 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP1
#8500

/:
@KEYCONT
#8502
@NOREAD
#8502=0
@NUMREAD
#8502=1
@ADRREAD
#8502=2
@ASCREAD
#8502=3

/: MDIKEY IN CONTROL.
/:
No Data read.
/:
Numeric Data read.
/:
Address+Numeric Data read.
/:
ASCII Data read.

@KEYCODE
@PAGEDW

/: MDIKEY IN CODE.
/:
Page Down
KEY pushed.

/:
#8501
1

47

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@PAGEUP
@CURUP
@CURDW
@CURLF
@CURRT
@INPUT
@RESET
@SFTRT
@SFT1
@SFT2
@SFT3
@SFT4
@SFT5
@SFT6
@SFT7
@SFT8
@SFT9
@SFT10

2
3
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

Page Up
Cursor Up
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Input
Reset
Soft key right
Soft key 1
Soft key 2
Soft key 3
Soft key 4
Soft key 5
Soft key 6
Soft key 7
Soft key 8
Soft key 9
Soft key 10

/:
@KEYDATA
@KEYADRS
@KEYARRY

#8503
#8504
#8552

/: MDIKEY IN DATA.
/: MDIKEY IN ADDRESS.
/: MDIKEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.

@CHRPROG
@CRTFUNC

#8509
#8530

/: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No.


/: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.

@ARRY2BS
@ARRY3BS
@ARRY1CT
@ARRY2CT
@ARRYTOP

#8512
#8513
#8516
#8517
#8519

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

Array
Array
Array
Array
Array

@TRNSDAT
@TRNS2BS
@TRNS3BS
@TRNS2TO
@TRNS3TO

#8511
#8512
#8513
#8514
#8515

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

Transfer
Transfer
Transfer
Transfer
Transfer

@PAPROGN
@PABLOKN
@PAVARNO
@PAPNTVN
@PAERROR

#8520
#8521
#8522
#8523
#8529

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

CNC
CNC
CNC
CNC
CNC

@PABGEDT
@PAPGCNT
@PAFPMEM

#8526
#8527
#8528

/: BGedit status.
/: Program count.
/: Free program memory.

@RSERROR

#8539

/: RS232C INTERFACE

@MDIKEYI0
@MDIKEYI1
@MDIKEYI2
@MDIKEYI3
@MDIKEYI4
@MDIKEYI5
@MDIKEYI6

#8540
#8541
#8542
#8543
#8544
#8545
#8546

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

/:

/:
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL (Top variable No.)

/:
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL
CONTORL

/:
PROG.
PROG.
PROG.
PROG.
PROG.

ACCESS.
ACCESS.
ACCESS.
ACCESS.
ACCESS.

(PROGRAM No.)
(BLOCK
No.)
(DATA VAR. No.)
(POINT DATA VAR. No.)
(RETURN CODE)

/:

/:
(RETURN CODE)

/:
MDI
MDI
MDI
MDI
MDI
MDI
MDI

Key
Key
Key
Key
Key
Key
Key

image
image
image
image
image
image
image

48

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@MDIKEYI7
@MDIKEYI8
@MDIKEYI9

#8547
#8548
#8549

/: MDI Key image


/: MDI Key image
/: MDI Key image

@CUTTIME
@CUTLENG

#8553
#8554

/: Cutting Time.
/: Cutting length.

@ITLCNTL
@ITLSTTS

#8605
#8606

/: Inter Lock control.


/: Skip signal movement direction.

@PMGSLCT

#8602

/: PMC AXIS select.

@PCDWKNO

#8610

/: Pcode Work No. search.

@TRQLTID
@TRQWT
@TRQRD
@TRQLTAX
@TRQLTVL
@TRQLTER

#8990
100
101
#8991
#8992
#8993

/: Limited torque
/:
write.
/:
read.
/:
/:
/:

@CNVADID1
@ADGEN
@ADSPDL
@ADAXS
@CNVADID2
@CNVADVAL
@CNVADERR

#8997
400
401
402
#8998
#8999
#8996

/: A/D converter
/:
general.
spindle.
/:
/:
axis.
/:
/:
/:

@MSKCLAX
@MSKCLTC

#8690
#8691

/: AXIS Macro call mask.


/: T code call mask.

/:

/:

/:
(Gcode control)

/:
/:
override ID.

axis no.
value.(0255)
return code.

/:
ID1.

ID2.
value.
return code.

/:

/:
/:
/:
/:

No.03 System Variable.


~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@EMPTY
#0
/: EMPTY.
@ENMTY
#0
/: EMPTY.
@ALARM
#3000
/: Alarm display.
@TIMER1
#3001
/: Msec Timer.
@TIMER2
#3002
/: Hour Timer.
@SBKCNT
#3003
/: Single blok/Auxilialy function control.
@FLDCNT
#3004
/: Feed hold/Over ride control.
@MDLG01
#4001
/: Modal Gcode Group 1
@MDLG02
#4002
/: Modal Gcode Group 2
@MDLG03
#4003
/: Modal Gcode Group 3
@MDLG04
#4004
/: Modal Gcode Group 4
@MDLG05
#4005
/: Modal Gcode Group 5
@MDLG06
#4006
/: Modal Gcode Group 6
@MDLG07
#4007
/: Modal Gcode Group 7
@MDLG08
#4008
/: Modal Gcode Group 8
@MDLG09
#4009
/: Modal Gcode Group 9
@MDLG10
#4010
/: Modal Gcode Group 10
@MDLG11
#4011
/: Modal Gcode Group 11
@MDLG12
#4012
/: Modal Gcode Group 12
@MDLG13
#4013
/: Modal Gcode Group 13
@MDLG14
#4014
/: Modal Gcode Group 14
@MDLG15
#4015
/: Modal Gcode Group 15

49

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@MDLG16
@MDLG17
@MDLG18
@MDLG19
@MDLG20
@MDLG25
@MDLG26
@CORDF
@CORDM
@SEQNUM
@PRGNUM
@CORDS
@CORDT

#4016
#4017
#4018
#4019
#4020
#4025
#4026
#4109
#4113
#4114
#4115
#4119
#4120

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

@ABSIO1
@ABSIO2
@ABSIO3
@ABSIO4
@ABSIO5
@ABSIO6
@ABSIO7
@ABSIO8
@ABSIO9
@ABSI10
@ABSMT1
@ABSMT2
@ABSMT3
@ABSMT4
@ABSMT5
@ABSMT6
@ABSMT7
@ABSMT8
@ABSMT9
@ABSMT10
@ABSOT1
@ABSOT2
@ABSOT3
@ABSOT4
@ABSOT5
@ABSOT6
@ABSOT7
@ABSOT8
@ABSOT9
@ABSOT10
@ABSKP1
@ABSKP2
@ABSKP3
@ABSKP4
@ABSKP5
@ABSKP6
@ABSKP7
@ABSKP8
@ABSKP9
@ABSKP10
@OFSEXW1
@OFSEXW2
@OFSEXW3

#5001
#5002
#5003
#5004
#5005
#5006
#5007
#5008
#5009
#5010
#5021
#5022
#5023
#5024
#5025
#5026
#5027
#5028
#5029
#5030
#5041
#5042
#5043
#5044
#5045
#5046
#5047
#5048
#5049
#5050
#5061
#5062
#5063
#5064
#5065
#5066
#5067
#5068
#5069
#5070
#5201
#5202
#5203

/: Block end position. 1st


/:
2nd

Modal Gcode Group


Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
Modal Gcode Group
F cord
M cord
Sequece number
Program number
S cord
T cord

16
17
18
19
20
25
26

/:

/: Machine Position.

/: Current absolute position.

/: Skip cutting position.

/: AXIS 1 External workpiece reference offset.


/: AXIS 2
/: AXIS 3

50

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

@OFSEXW4
@OFSEXW5
@OFSEXW6
@OFSEXW7
@OFSEXW8
@OFSEXW9
@OFSEXW10
@OFS54W1
@OFS54W2
@OFS54W3
@OFS54W4
@OFS54W5
@OFS54W6
@OFS54W7
@OFS54W8
@OFS54W9
@OFS54W10
@OFS55W1
@OFS55W2
@OFS55W3
@OFS55W4
@OFS55W5
@OFS55W6
@OFS55W7
@OFS55W8
@OFS55W9
@OFS55W10
@OFS56W1
@OFS56W2
@OFS56W3
@OFS56W4
@OFS56W5
@OFS56W6
@OFS56W7
@OFS56W8
@OFS56W9
@OFS56W10
@OFS57W1
@OFS57W2
@OFS57W3
@OFS57W4
@OFS57W5
@OFS57W6
@OFS57W7
@OFS57W8
@OFS57W9
@OFS57W10
@OFS58W1
@OFS58W2
@OFS58W3
@OFS58W4
@OFS58W5
@OFS58W6
@OFS58W7
@OFS58W8
@OFS58W9
@OFS58W10

#5204
#5205
#5206
#5207
#5208
#5209
#5210
#5221
#5222
#5223
#5224
#5225
#5226
#5227
#5228
#5229
#5230
#5241
#5242
#5243
#5244
#5245
#5246
#5247
#5248
#5249
#5250
#5261
#5262
#5263
#5264
#5265
#5266
#5267
#5268
#5269
#5270
#5281
#5282
#5283
#5284
#5285
#5286
#5287
#5288
#5289
#5290
#5301
#5302
#5303
#5304
#5305
#5306
#5307
#5308
#5309
#5310

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS 10
AXIS 1 G54
AXIS 2
AXIS 3
AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS10
AXIS 1 G55
AXIS 2
AXIS 3
AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS10
AXIS 1 G56
AXIS 2
AXIS 3
AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS10
AXIS 1 G57
AXIS 2
AXIS 3
AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS10
AXIS 1 G58
AXIS 2
AXIS 3
AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS10

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

workpiece reference offset.

workpiece reference offset.

workpiece reference offset.

workpiece reference offset.

workpiece reference offset.

51

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION


APPENDIX
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@OFS59W1
@OFS59W2
@OFS59W3
@OFS59W4
@OFS59W5
@OFS59W6
@OFS59W7
@OFS59W8
@OFS59W9
@OFS59W10
/:
/:
/:
/:

#5321
#5322
#5323
#5324
#5325
#5326
#5327
#5328
#5329
#5330

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:

AXIS 1 G59 workpiece reference offset.


AXIS 2
AXIS 3
AXIS 4
AXIS 5
AXIS 6
AXIS 7
AXIS 8
AXIS 9
AXIS10

No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE.


~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ON
=1
@OFF
=0

/:
$LIST

52

B66102E/10

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

The table below indicates the error codes that may occur in compile
processing.
Compile Error Codes (1/3)
Meaning

Error code
0000

Normal termination

0201

Too many programs

0202

There is no program.

1001

Block delete number contains decimal point.

1002

Block delete number other than 1 to 9 is coded.

1003

Program number is coded not at start of program.

1004

Sequence number is coded not at start of block.

1005

NC statement has format error.

1006

Code other than EOB is present at end of macro statement.

1007

Equal sign cannot be found with macro statement.

1008

DO nesting depth exceeded 3 levels.

1009

Relation operator cannot be found in conditional expression.

100a

IF is not followed by GOTO.

100b

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for IF[<conditional-expression>].

100c

GOTO n is followed by code other than EOB.

100d

DO m is followed by code other than EOB.

100e

END m is followed by code other than EOB.

100f

Identification number of END does not match DO.

1010

END to match DO cannot be found.

1011

WHILE is not followed by DO.

1012

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for WHILE[<conditional-expression>].

1013

Block not identifiable as NC statement or macro statement is


present.

1014

DO to match END cannot be found.

1015

Program number of directory does not match program number


in program.

1016

Program number is missing at start of program.

1017

Error in the IF [...] THEN part

1018

Error in the SETVN statement

1019

Error in DEFADD

101a

Error in the POPEN command

101b

Error in the PCLOS command

101c

Error in the BPRNT command

101d

Error in the DPRNT command

53

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Compile Error Codes (2/3)


Error code

Meaning

101e

Error in the PGN command

101f

Error in the FDEL command

1020

Error in the FOPEN command

1021

Error in the FCLOS command

1022

Error in the FREAD command

1023

Error in the FWRITE command

1024

Error in the FPSET command

1025

Too many IF [...] THEN parts

1027

ccall not followed by EOB code

1028

The multiplicity of IF [...] THEN parts exceeds 3.

1029

AND and OR conditions in the IF [...] part

1030

ENDIF not found for the IF [...] THEN part

1031

More than four ANDs or ORs

1033

The number of ELSEs does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.

1034

The number of ENDIFs does not match that of IF [...] THEN


parts.

1035

The number of THENs does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.

1201

Nesting depth of parentheses exceeded 5 levels.

1202

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for #[<expression>].

1203

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for [<expression>].

1204

Second opening bracket ([) cannot be found for ATAN[<expression>]/[<expression>].

1205

Slash (/) cannot be found for ATAN[<expression>]/[<expression>].

1206

First closing bracket (]) cannot be found for ATAN[<expression>]/[<expression>].

1207

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for function [<expression>].

1208

Format of <expression> contains error.

1209

Format of <expression> on left side of assignment statement


contains error.

120a

Format of <expression> in <address>[<expression>], <address>-[<expression>], or GOTO[<expression>] contains error.

120b

Error in the array

1401

Numeric value longer than 8 digits is present.

1402

Decimal point is followed by code other than number.

1403

Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.

1404

# is not immediately followed by number or opening bracket ([).

1405

Program number is longer than 4 digits.

1406

Sequence number is longer than 4 digits.

1407

Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for function [<expression>].

1408

Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for IF[<expression>] or


WHILE[<expression>].

1409

Number m in DO m or END m is longer than 1 digit.

54

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Compile Error Codes (3/3)


Error code

Meaning

140a

Number m in DO m or END m is not number from 1 to 3.

140b

DO or END is followed by code other than number.

140c

Alphabetic character string not identifiable as control command


or function are present.

140d

Alphabetic character string longer than 5 characters is present.

140e

EOR is missing at end of program.

140f

Code not usable in program is present.

1410

Character string is longer than 255 characters.

1411

Internal code is longer than 4 characters.

1412

Internal code is not represented in hexadecimal.

1413

Internal code that cannot be represented is specified.

1414

Character string command starting with (* does not end with *).

1415

Pair of parentheses contains unallowable character.

1416

Unusable character found between , and ;

1417

Unusable character found between @ and @

1418

Error in the @ and @ specification

1419

Hexadecimal code exceeding two digits

1420

Error in the characters or length of a hexadecimal character string

1421

0 or N not followed by a digit

1601

Temporary variable area used for executor is insufficient.


NC statement of 1 block includes too many addresses containing <expression>.

1602

GOTO destination is to great. Set jump destination for 4-byte


output with parameter, or reduce program.

1603

NC statement of 1 block contains more than 50 addresses.

1604

Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.

1605

Macro variable number is negative.

1606

Macro variable number contains decimal point.

1607

Number after GOTO is longer than 4 digits.

1608

Number after GOTO contains decimal point.

1681

One program contains more than 200 GOTO statements specifying sequence numbers directly.

1682

Sequence number for GOTO destination cannot be found.

1683

One program contains more than 100 WHILE statements.

1684

Multiple sequence numbers are present for GOTO destination.

1801

ROM cassette overflowed.

1900

% not found or not correct

2000

Press the RESET button.

2001

Unable to read an NC program

8000

Error in a program number

8001

Unable to convert ASCII codes

9999

missmatch err_code !!

55

C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION
PARAMETER TABLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE

Cassette type

K1xx

K2xx

IDxxxx

VCxx

VPxx

Pxx

Series 0

64Kbyte

K110

K223

ID40B0

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 0

128Kbyte

K110

K226

ID50B0

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 0

256Kbyte

K110

K223

ID40B1

VCC0

VP64

P01

Series 0

512Kbyte

K110

K223

ID50B2

VCC0

VP64

P01

Series 0

1M byte

K110

K223

ID40B2

VCC0

VP64

P01

Series 15

256Kbyte

K110

K223

ID60BD

VCC0

VP64

P01

Series 15

512Kbyte

K110

K223

ID80BD

VCC0

VP64

P01

Series 16A

256Kbyte

K111

K230

IDFFF4

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 16A

512Kbyte

K111

K230

IDFFF3

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 16A

1M byte

K111

K230

IDFFF2

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 16A

2M byte

K111

K231

IDFFF1

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

128Kbyte

K110

K230

IDFFF5

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

256Kbyte

K110

K230

IDFFF4

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

512Kbyte

K110

K230

IDFFF3

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

1M byte

K110

K230

IDFFF2

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

2M byte

K110

K231

IDFFF1

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Example 1)
A Series 0 128K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified.
A:\> MRO WT SAMPL.ROM K110 K226 ID50B0 VF

Example 2)
A Series 15 512K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified.
A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K221 -ID80BD -VCC0-VP64 -P01 -VF

56

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

The compile/link example described below is created under the directory


X:\MCOMP\USR\SAMPL

when the macro compiler utility system is installed.


Details of sample:
Times required for instruction execution by each of the conversational
macros are measured:
1. #100 = #101+#102 ;
2. #100 = #101 AND #102 ;
3. #100 = SIN[#101] ;

The number of test operations is set beforehand in the common variable


(#500). Time required for looping by the number of test operations by the
WHILE instruction is measured by the timer variable (#3001). Then time
required for the same number of loops by the WHILE instruction
containing an instruction subject to measurement is measured. Thus the
difference between two measurement times is the execution time of the
instruction subject to measurement.
(1) Programs created
File name = MAIN.SRC
File name = SUB1.SRC

Main source program file


Subprogram source file

File
File
File
File
File
File

Main program reference list file


Main program compile list file
Main program object file
Subprogram reference list file
Subprogram compile list file
Subprogram object file

name
name
name
name
name
name

=
=
=
=
=
=

MAIN.REF
MAIN.LST
MAIN.REL
SUB1.REF
SUB1.LST
SUB1.REL

(2) Macro liner


File name = SAMPL.LNK
File name = SAMPL.MAP
File name = SAMPL.ROM

57

Link control file


Link map list file
ROM-format file

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Main program source file

File name : MAIN.SRC

/:
/: SAMPLE Program.
/:
/:
Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
/:
(Vol 01.01 1997.03.14)
/:
/:
/:
( MAIN Program )
/:
/:
/: Symbol define.
/:
/:
System common symbole FILE Include.
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
/:
/:
@LOOPCT
#500
/: TEST Loop count.
@TIMESAV #501
/: No-operatinon Time save.
@TSTTIME #502
/: Measured Time save.
/:
/:
@COUNT
#100
/: Loop counter work.
@WORK
#100
/: Work regster.
/:
/:
>LOOP
100
/: GOTO Sequense No. define.
>FIN
999
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
No. O1000 : Main program.
/:
O1000
;
NUMREAD
; Numeric data input.
CURSOR OFF Delete this line in Series15. ; Cursol OFF
DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (EXECUTION TIME TEST)
; MENU display.
X2 Y2
(1.#101=#102+#103)
;
X2 Y3
(2.#101=#102 AND #103);
X2 Y4
(3.#101=SIN[#102])
;
;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.)
;
IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN
; INPUT key push ?
IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN
;
0 < DATA < 3 chk.
IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN
;
; No-ope. Time GET.
COUNT = LOOPCT
;
Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0
;
Timer initialize.
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
;
COUNT = COUNT -1
;
No-operation loop.
END1
;
TIMESAV = TIMER1

;
;

58

Sample time save.

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

; Jump To TEST progra.


; O1x00:x=key in data.
;
; END of conv. MACRO.

FIN RETURNP LOOP


/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/:
No. O1001 : Answer display sub program.
/:
/:
LOOPCT
: TEST Loop count.
/:
TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time.
/:
TSTTIME : Measured Time.
/:
O1001
;
DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER)
; Loop count display.
X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT
;
;
X5 Y6
(TOTAL TIME)
; Total measuer Time
X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC);
display.
;
WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT
; 1 operation Time
X5 Y8
(ONE OPERATION)
;
display.
X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK
K1 (MSEC) ;
;
RETURN
; Return to main.
/:
/:
%

59

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Main program reference list file

(F0/F16)

File name : MAIN.REF

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 1
MAIN.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------

S-Line G-Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218

/:
/: SAMPLE Program.
/:
/:
Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
/:
(Vol 01.01
/:
/:
/:
( MAIN Program )
/:
/:
/: Symbol define.
/:
/:
System common symbole FILE Include.
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
$NOLIST
/:
/:
@LOOPCT
#500
/: TEST Loop count.
@TIMESAV #501
/: No-operatinon Time save.
@TSTTIME #502
/: Measured Time save.
/:
/:
@COUNT
#100
/: Loop counter work.
@WORK
#100
/: Work regster.
/:
/:
>LOOP
100
/: GOTO Sequense No. define.
>FIN
999
/:
/:
$EJECT

60

1997.03.14)

B66102E/10

(F0/F16)

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 2
MAIN.SRC

S-Line G-Line
219
/:
220
/:
No. O1000 : Main program.
221
/:
222
0001
O1000
;
223
0002
NUMREAD
;
Numeric data input.
224
0003
CURSOR OFF
;
Cursol OFF
225
0004
DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (EXECUTION TIME TEST)
;
MENU display.
226
0005
X2 Y2
(1.#101=#102+#103)
;
227
0006
X2 Y3
(2.#101=#102 AND #103);
228
0007
X2 Y4
(3.#101=SIN[#102])
;
229
0008
;
230
0009
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.)
;
231
0010
IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN
;
INPUT key push ?
232
0011
IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN
;
0 < DATA < 3 chk.
233
0012
IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN
;
234
0013
;
No-ope. Time GET.
235
0014
COUNT = LOOPCT
;
Loop counter set.
236
0015
TIMER1 = 0
;
Timer initialize.
237
0016
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
;
238
0017
COUNT = COUNT -1
;
No-operation loop.
239
0018
END1
;
240
0019
TIMESAV = TIMER1
;
Sample time save.
241
0020
;
242
0021
TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000
;
Jump To TEST progra.
243
0022
;
O1x00:x=key in data.
244
0023
;
245
0024
FIN RETURNP LOOP
;
END of conv. MACRO.
246
/:
247
/:
248
$EJECT

61

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

(F0/F16)

APPENDIX

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

B66102E/10

Page 3
MAIN.SRC

S-Line G-Line
249
/:
250
/:
251
/:
No. O1001 : Answer display sub program.
252
/:
253
/:
LOOPCT
: TEST Loop count.
TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time.
254
/:
255
/:
TSTTIME : Measured Time.
256
/:
257
0025
O1001
;
258
0026
DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER)
;
Loop count display.
259
0027
X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT
;
260
0028
;
261
0029
X5 Y6
(TOTAL TIME)
;
Total measuer Time
262
0030
X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC);
263
0031
;
264
0032
WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT
;
1 operation Time
265
0033
X5 Y8
(ONE OPERATION)
;
266
0034
X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK
K1 (MSEC) ;
267
0035
;
268
0036
RETURN
;
Return to main.
269
/:
270
/:
271
0037
%

62

display.

display.

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(F0/F16)

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 4
MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------Symbol


RETURN
RETURNP
DISPLAY
FORM
DATA
ZSUP
TAIWAP1
NUMREAD
KEYCODE
INPUT
KEYDATA
CURSOR
TIMER1
OFF
LOOPCT
TIMESAV
TSTTIME
COUNT
WORK
LOOP
FIN

Define
M99
M99P
G243
F
D
Z1
#8500
#8502=1
#8501
8
#8503
#8505
#3001
=0
#500
#501
#502
#100
#100
100
999

Line No.
268
245
225, 230,
259, 266
259, 262,
259
242
223
231
231
232, 233,
224
236, 240
224
235, 259,
240, 262,
262, 264
235, 237,
264, 266
230, 245
231, 232,

258
266

242

264
264
238, 238

233, 245

63

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Main program compile list file

File name : MAIN.LST

-----------------------------------

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:27:43
Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 1
MAIN.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -------------------------------------------------- program O1000 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line


0001
1
O1000;
0002
2
#8502=1;
0003
3
#8505=0;
0004
4
G243X0Y0B0(*0045 0058 0045 0043 0055 0054 0049 004F004E
004D 0045 0020 0054 0045 0053 0054*);
0005
5
X2Y2(*0031 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030
0031 0030 0033*);
0006
6
X2Y3(*0032 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030
004E 0044 0020 0023 0031 0030 0033*);
0007
7
X2Y4(*0033 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E
0030 0032 005D*);
0008
8
;
0009
9
N100G243X8Y11B1(SELECT TEST NO.);
0010
10
IF[#8501NE8]GOTO999;
0011
11
IF[#8503LT1]GOTO999;
0012
12
IF[#8503GT3]GOTO999;
0013
13
;
0014
14
#100=#500;
0015
15
#3001=0;
0016
16
WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
0017
17
#100=#100-1;
0018
18
END1;
0019
19
#501=#3001;
0020
20
;
0021
21
#8500=#8503*100+1000;
0022
22
;
0023
23
;
0024
24
N999M99P100;
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 24 blocks, 24 total lines
program size = 250 bytes

64

0020 0054 0049


0032 002B 0023
0032 0020 0041
005B 0023 0031

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:27:46
Macro Compiler V01.01

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

Page 2
MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100


#500
#501
#3001
#8500
#8501
#8502
#8503
#8505

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

14, 16, 17, 17,


14,
19,
15, 19,
21,
10,
2,
11, 12, 21,
3,

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:27:46
Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 3
MAIN.SRC

---------- program O1001 --------------------------------------------G-Line


0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037

P-Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

O1001;
G243X5Y4B0(SANPLE COUNTER);
X20Y4F6Z1D#500;
;
X5Y6(TOTAL TIME);
X20Y6D[#502-#501]K1(MSEC);
;
#100=[#502-#501]/#500;
X5Y8(ONE OPERATION);
X20Y8F5.2D#100K1(MSEC);
;
M99;
%

---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 13 blocks, 13 total lines


program size = 145 bytes
14-Mar-1997 16:27:47
(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 4
MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100


#500
#501
#502

:
:
:
:

8,
3,
6,
6,

10,
8,
8,
8,

65

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

Subprogram source file

B66102E/10

File name : SUB1.SRC

/:
/: SAMPLE Program.
/:
/:
Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
(Vol 01.01 1997.03.14)
/:
/:
/:
/:
( SUB Program )
/:
/:
/: Symbol define.
/:
/:
System common symbole FILE Include.
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
/:
/:
@LOOPCT
#500
/: TEST Loop count.
@TIMESAV #501
/: No-operatinon Time save.
@TSTTIME #502
/: Measured Time save.
/:
/:
@COUNT
#100
/: Loop counter work.
@MAINPR
1000
/: MAIN Program No.
@DISPSUB 1001
/: Answer display SUB Program.
/:
/:
>LOOP
100
/: GOTO Sequense No. define.
>FIN
999
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/:
(#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test.
/:
/:
No. O1100 : SUB program.
/:
/:
O1100
;
NOREAD
; NO data read.
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (#101=#102+#103 TEST)
; Operation code disp.
;
COUNT = LOOPCT
; Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0
; Timer initialize.
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
;
#101 = #102 + #103
; (Time Measure)
COUNT = COUNT -1
;
END1
;
;
TSTTIME = TIMER1
; Measure Time save.
CALL
DISPSUB
; Measure Time disp.

66

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY)


IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN
RETURNP LOOP
FIN

TAIWAP1 = MAINPR
RETURN

/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
O1200
NOREAD

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

;
;
; RESET key wait.
;
;
;
;

(#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test.


No. O1200 : SUB program.

;
; NO data read.
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (#101=#102 AND #103 TEST); Operation code disp.
;
COUNT = LOOPCT
; Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0
; Timer initialize.
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
;
#101 = #102 AND #103
; (Time Measure)
COUNT = COUNT -1
;
END1
;
;
TSTTIME = TIMER1
; Measure Time save.
;
CALL
DISPSUB
; Measure Time disp.
;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY)
;
IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN
; RESET key wait.
RETURNP LOOP
;
;
FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR
;
RETURN
;
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/:
(#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test.
/:
/:
No. O1300 : SUB program.
/:
/:
O1300
;
NOREAD
; NO data read.
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (#101=SIN[#102])
; Operation code disp.

COUNT = LOOPCT
TIMER1 = 0

;
; Loop counter set.
; Timer initialize.

67

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
#101 = SIN[#102]
COUNT = COUNT -1
END1
TSTTIME = TIMER1
CALL

DISPSUB

LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY)


IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN
RETURNP LOOP
FIN

TAIWAP1 = MAINPR
RETURN

APPENDIX

;
; (Time Measure)
;
;
;
; Measure Time save.
;
; Measure Time disp.
;
;
; RESET key wait.
;
;
;
;

68

B66102E/10

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Subprogram reference list file

File name :SUB1.REF

--------------------------------------

(F0/F16)

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 1
SUB1.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------

S-Line G-Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219

/:
/: SAMPLE Program.
/:
/:
Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
(Vol 01.01
/:
/:
/:
/:
( SUB Program )
/:
/:
/: Symbol define.
/:
/:
System common symbole FILE Include.
/:
pINCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
pNOLIST
/:
/:
@LOOPCT
#500
/: TEST Loop count.
@TIMESAV #501
/: No-operatinon Time save.
@TSTTIME #502
/: Measured Time save.
/:
/:
@COUNT
#100
/: Loop counter work.
@MAINPR
1000
/: MAIN Program No.
@DISPSUB 1001
/: Answer display SUB Program.
/:
/:
>LOOP
100
/: GOTO Sequense No. define.
>FIN
999
/:
/:
$EJECT

69

1997.03.14)

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

(F0/F16)

S-Line
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251

APPENDIX

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

B66102E/10

Page 2
SUB1.SRC

G-Line

0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
O1100
NOREAD

(#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test.


No. O1100 : SUB program.

DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (#101=#102+#103 TEST)


COUNT = LOOPCT
TIMER1 = 0
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
#101 = #102 + #103
COUNT = COUNT -1
END1
TSTTIME = TIMER1
CALL

DISPSUB

LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY)


IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN
RETURNP LOOP
FIN

TAIWAP1 = MAINPR
RETURN

/:
/:
$EJECT

70

;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;

NO data read.
Operation code disp.
Loop counter set.
Timer initialize.
(Time Measure)

Measure Time save.


Measure Time disp.

RESET key wait.

(F0/F16)

S-Line
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 3
SUB1.SRC

G-Line

0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
O1200
NOREAD

(#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test.


No. O1200 : SUB program.

;
;
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (#101=#102 AND #103 TEST);
;
COUNT = LOOPCT
;
TIMER1 = 0
;
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
;
#101 = #102 AND #103
;
COUNT = COUNT -1
;
END1
;
;
TSTTIME = TIMER1
;
;
CALL
DISPSUB
;
;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY)
;
IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN
;
RETURNP LOOP
;
;
FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR
;
RETURN
;
/:
/:
$EJECT

71

NO data read.
Operation code disp.
Loop counter set.
Timer initialize.
(Time Measure)

Measure Time save.


Measure Time disp.

RESET key wait.

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

(F0/F16)

S-Line
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313

APPENDIX

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

B66102E/10

Page 4
SUB1.SRC

G-Line

0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067

/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
/:
O1300
NOREAD

(#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test.


No. O1300 : SUB program.

DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (#101=SIN[#102])
COUNT = LOOPCT
TIMER1 = 0
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1
#101 = SIN[#102]
COUNT = COUNT -1
END1
TSTTIME = TIMER1
CALL

DISPSUB

LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY)


IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN
RETURNP LOOP
FIN

TAIWAP1 = MAINPR
RETURN

72

;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;

NO data read.
Operation code disp.
Loop counter set.
Timer initialize.
(Time Measure)

Measure Time save.


Measure Time disp.

RESET key wait.

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(F0/F16)

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5


Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 5
SUB1.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------Symbol


CALL
RETURN
RETURNP
DISPLAY

Define
M98P
M99
M99P
G243

TAIWAP1
NOREAD
KEYCODE
RESET
TIMER1

#8500
#8502=0
#8501
10
#3001

LOOPCT
TSTTIME
COUNT

#500
#502
#100

MAINPR
DISPSUB
LOOP

1000
1001
100

FIN

999

Line No.
241, 273,
248, 280,
245, 277,
230, 243,
307
247, 279,
228, 260,
244, 276,
244, 276,
233, 239,
303
232, 264,
239, 271,
232, 234,
266, 268,
300, 300
247, 279,
241, 273,
243, 245,
309
244, 247,
311

305
312
309
262, 275, 294,
311
292
308
308
265, 271, 297,
296
303
236, 236, 264,
268, 296, 298,
311
305
275, 277, 307,
276, 279, 308,

73

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

Subprogram compile list file

B66102E/10

File name : SUB1.LST

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:27:57
Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 1
SUB1.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- program O1100 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line


0001
1
0002
2
0003
3
0004
4
0030 0033 0020 0054
0005
5
0006
6
0007
7
0008
8
0009
9
0010
10
0011
11
0012
12
0013
13
0014
14
0015
15
0016
16
0017
17
0018
18
0019
19
0020
20
0021
21
0022
22

O1100;
#8502=0;
;
G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 002B 0023 0031
0045 0053 0054*);
;
#100=#500;
#3001=0;
WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
#101=#102+#103;
#100=#100-1;
END1;
;
#502=#3001;
;
M98P1001;
;
N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY);
IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999;
M99P100;
;
N999#8500=1000;
M99;

---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines


program size = 163 bytes

74

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100


#101
#102
#103
#500
#502
#3001
#8500
#8501
#8502

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

6, 8, 10, 10,
9,
9,
9,
6,
13,
7, 13,
21,
18,
2,

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:27:59
Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 3
SUB1.SRC

---------- program O1200 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line


0023
1
0024
2
0025
3
0026
4
0044 0020 0023 0031
0054*);
0027
5
0028
6
0029
7
0030
8
0031
9
0032
10
0033
11
0034
12
0035
13
0036
14
0037
15
0038
16
0039
17
0040
18
0041
19
0042
20
0043
21
0044
22

O1200;
#8502=0;
;
G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 0020 0041 004E
0030 0033 0020 0054 0045 0053
;
#100=#500;
#3001=0;
WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
#101=#102AND#103;
#100=#100-1;
END1;
;
#502=#3001;
;
M98P1001;
;
N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY);
IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999;
M99P100;
;
N999#8500=1000;
M99;

---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines


program size = 167 bytes

75

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100


#101
#102
#103
#500
#502
#3001
#8500
#8501
#8502

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

6, 8, 10, 10,
9,
9,
9,
6,
13,
7, 13,
21,
18,
2,

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:28:01
Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 5
SUB1.SRC

---------- program O1300 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line


0045
1
0046
2
0047
3
0048
4
0032 005D*);
0049
5
0050
6
0051
7
0052
8
0053
9
0054
10
0055
11
0056
12
0057
13
0058
14
0059
15
0060
16
0061
17
0062
18
0063
19
0064
20
0065
21
0066
22
0067
23

O1300;
#8502=0;
;
G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 005B 0023 0031 0030
;
#100=#500;
#3001=0;
WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
#101=SIN[#102];
#100=#100-1;
END1;
;
#502=#3001;
;
M98P1001;
;
N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY);
IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999;
M99P100;
;
N999#8500=1000;
M99;
%

---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 23 blocks, 23 total lines


program size = 156 bytes

76

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100


#101
#102
#500
#502
#3001
#8500
#8501
#8502

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

6, 8, 10, 10,
9,
9,
6,
13,
7, 13,
21,
18,
2,

Link control file

File name : SAMPL.LNK

--------------------------------------

/:
/:
Conversation MACRO Sample program
LINK control file.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
/:
/:
/: Library file FS0-MC
/:
CNC=\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX
/:
/: compile parameter P9000 - P9009 and P9010 - P9059
/:
P9000=10000010
P9001=00000001
P9002=00100000
P9003=00000001
P9037=5
P9038=1000
/:
/: Link files
/:
FILE=MAIN
FILE=SUB1
/:

77

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Link map list file

File name : SAMPL.MAP

--------------------------------------

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:28:3


Macro Linker V01.01

Page 1

SAMPL.MAP
---------- Library List -----------------------------------------------NO
1
LIBRARY

FILE NAME

LIBRARY NAME

\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX

0-MC MACRO

---------- Compile Parameter ------------------------------------------P9000


P9001
P9002
P9003
P9037
P9038

=
=
=
=
=
=

10000010
00000001
00100000
00000001
5
1000

---------- Object List ------------------------------------------------FILE NAME

PROG

MAIN.REL

01000
01001
01100
01200
01300

SUB1.REL

SIZE
0000FAH
000091H
0000A3H
0000A7H
00009CH

---------- ROM FILE SIZE ----------------------------------------------SIZE = 10000H ( 64KB )

78

B66102E/10

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION


GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
APPENDIX
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR


THE FANUC Series 16/18 Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

79

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION


GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
APPENDIX
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

E.1
INTRODUCTION

B66102E/10

Appendix E describes how to operate the tool for supporting the


conversational automatic programming function (Super CAP M/Super
CAP II M) for milling machines.
The user can convert conversational programming menu definition
programs together with other macro programs to ROM-format files in a
personal computer using the procedure below:
The procedures for creating a ROM file and MEM file for Super CAP M
or Super CAP II M are described below.
(1) Create the following menu definition programs with an editor.
D Menu definition program
D Conversational data definition program
D Data item display program
(2) Convert a source file to the table data file in the Super CAP/Super
CAP II M table format using the macro converter (MCONV).
Example: MCONV JZH_PARA
JZH_PARA: Name of source program file for table data
(3) Compile the source programs to object files using the macro compiler
(MCOMPO).
Example: MCOMPO MACHINE
MACHINE: Source program file name
(4) Use the macro linker (MLINK) to convert the object and table data
files to ROMformat files.
Example: MLINK BJ64_J
BJ64_J: Link control file name
(5) Use the MEM file conversion tool (MMCARD) to convert
ROMformat files to memorycardformat files.
This step is not required for the Series 16/18MA.
Example: MMCARD BJ64_J
BJ64_J: ROMformat file name
For the syntax of menu definition programs, refer to the Super CAP M
Programming Manual (B-62153E).
NOTE
A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a
confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has
been signed.

80

B66102E/10

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION


GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
APPENDIX
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

E.2
MACRO CONVERTER
(MCONV)
E.2.1
Outline

A source file (extension: .DAT) containing a menu definition program,


conversational data definition program, and data item display program is
converted to the table data file (extension: .TBL). The conversion result
is output to the table conversion list (extension: .LST).

Menu definition program


Conversational data
definition program

MCONV

Table data
(***.TBL)

Data item display program


(***.DAT)
Table conversion list
(***.LST)

E.2.2
Operation

The command format is as follows:


A:\>MCONV file-spec parameters

(1) file-spec
Specifies the name of a source file to be converted. Specify a file
name in one of the two ways below:
D Directly specify a file name or file names
(Examples)
A:\>MCONV ABC DEF GHI

This command converts ABC.DAT, DEF.DAT, and GHI.DAT.


D Specify a link control file
(Examples)
A:\>MCONV @XYZ

This command converts the files specified with TBL= in


XYZ.LNK. For details, see Chapter 3.
(2) parameters
The following parameters can be specified.
NR : Disables table data and files to be output.
L1 : Disables the table conversion list to be output.

E.2.3
Source File

Create a source file consisting of menu definition programs in the format


of a text file. Be sure to assign extension .DAT to the source file.
The menu definition program, conversational data definition program,
and data item display program can be combined into the file as desired in
program units. All programs can be created in a single file. If a single
file contains a single program, up to 488 files can be created.
81

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION


GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
APPENDIX
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

E.2.4
Table Data File

E.2.5
Table Conversion List
File

B66102E/10

This file, which is output by the converter, is to be edited by the macro


linker. The name of the table data file is the same as that of the source file
but with extension .TBL.

Conversion results, such as the list of source programs, error locations,


error numbers, and converted file/program numbers, are output to this
file. The name of the table conversion list file is the same as that of the
source file but with extension .LST.

82

B66102E/10

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION


GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
APPENDIX
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

E.3
CONVERSION OF
TABLE DATA WITH
THE MACRO LINKER
(MLINK)
E.3.1
Outline

E.3.2
Link Control File

The table data file output by the macro converter can be converted
together with the object file output by the macro compiler to ROM-format
files with the macro linker.

The following shows an example of specifying a table data file. In the


example, the table data file consists of MENU.TBL for menu definition,
DATA.TBL for conversational data, and KOMK.TBL for data item
display.
/: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE
/: SYSTEM FILE
CNC=A:\BJ64.PG1
CNC2=A:\BJ64.PG2
CNC3=A:\BJ64.PG3
/: LINK PARAMETER
P9000=11000000
P9001=00000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10000000
P9007=10000000
P9033=12
P9037=5
9038=8000
/: MACRO PROGRAM
FILE=ABC,DEF
/: TABLE DATA
TBL=MENU,DATA,KOMK
/:

E.3.3
Link List File

The link list file to be output by the linker contains a table data file name,
program numbers, and program size as well as macro program functions.
The file name is the same as that of the link control file but the extension
is replaced with MAP.

83

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

APPENDIX

CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II


M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i

84

B66102E/10

B66102E/10

F.1
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

The conventional Super CAP system (referred to below as CAP),


compiles and links all the required user programs (referred to below as
programs) into a single MEM file (referred to below as a module), then
loads that file into the CNC.
Modular Super CAP (modular CAP) allows programs to be loaded into
the CNC as a set of modules. The modules include a CAP control module,
provided as a library, and other program modules.
After the CAP control module has been loaded into the CNC, a
userdeveloped module (user module) can be independently modified or
loaded.
NOTE
The modular function can be used with the modular CAP
only.

85

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

F.2
DEVELOPMENT
ENVIRONMENT

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

The requirements for developing a user module and operating it on the


CNC are listed below:
(1) Personal computer
D Main memory: At least 640K bytes
D OS: MSDOS Version 3.1 or above
D Hard disk: Minimum of about 20M bytes
D 3.5 floppy disk drive
(2) Peripherals
D Memory card adapter
D 4Mbyte flash memory card (Intel iMC004FLSA)
(3) FAPT macro compiler (for personal computers)
D A08B9001J760#EN07 (for FANUC Series 16i)
D A08B9001J765#EN07 (for FANUC Series 18i)
(4) FANUC Super CAP macro library
D CAP module
D Macro libraries 1 and 2 for developing user modules
(5) NC
D NC system supporting modular CAP
D Macro capacity of at least 3M bytes
D FROM module with sufficient capacity to transfer the CAP
control module and user modules

86

B66102E/10

F.3
CAP CONTROL
MODULE

APPENDIX

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

The CAP control module is a MEM file that is provided in place of the
conventional library file. The CAP control module is loaded into the
CNC.
The CAP control module contains the following programs:
D CAP system control program
D FANUC standard macro program (Super CAP II T only)

87

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

F.4

The following user modules can be created:

USER MODULES

D Up to two user modules (user modules 1 and 2).


D The maximum total size of user modules 1 and 2 is 768K bytes
for Super CAP II T and 1.625M bytes for Super CAP II M.
The subsequent sections describe the procedure for creating a user
module, restrictions, and notes.

F.4.1

The following macro libraries are provided for creating the user modules:

Macro Libraries for


Developing User
Modules

D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II T: F16ITP1.MEX,


F16ITP2.MEX
D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II M: F16IMP1.MEX,
F16IMP1C.MEX, F16IMP2.MEX
NOTE
1 F16?P1.MEX and F16?P1C.MEX are used to create user
module 1.
2 F16?P2.MEX is used to create user module 2.

F.4.2
Developing a User
Module

Follow the conventional procedure for developing a user module.


Specify a macro library for developing a user module instead of the
conventional macro library. Then, compile and link the modules, and
convert the modules into memory card format.
The compile parameters to be specified are the same as the conventional
parameters. When specifying the size of the memory card module,
however, specify the size of the user module in the compile parameter
indicated below:
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

9000

LD6

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

#0

Do not specify those bits indicated by shading.


Always specify LD6 to 1.
Size

M512

M256

M128

512KB

256KB

128KB

The size of user module 1 of Super CAP II M is always 1.375M bytes.


Do not specify the M512 bit for user module 2 of Super CAP II M.
Specify the series and edition of the user module by adding the following
two lines to the link file.
SERN = series
VERN = edition
The series and edition can be specified with a combination of up to four
characters each from numerals (0 to 9 and uppercase A to Z). The series
and edition specified in the link file are displayed on the conversational
system configuration screen (Super CAP only).
88

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

NOTE
Specify the user module series/edition display.

When a single user program is divided into two modules, specify the same
compile parameters (except parameter 9000) in the link files for user
modules 1 and 2.

F.4.3
Transferring the User
Module to FROM

User modules 1 and 2 must be loaded into FROM separately from the
CAP control module.
The CAP control module and user modules 1 and 2 have the following file
names on the FROM.
D CAP control module
PDff_CAP
Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter.
T when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or TPATH2.
M when SYSTEM is MPATH1 or MPATH2.
Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter.
1 when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or MPATH1
2 when SYSTEM is TPATH2 or MPATH2

D User module 1
P1ff
Size specified in compile parameter 9000. However,
_CAP is indicated for Super CAP II M.

D User module 2
P2ff

F.4.4
Executing the User
Program

When a FANUC standard program and a user program have identical


program numbers, the user program takes priority. A FANUC standard
program can, therefore, be changed by creating a new program in the user
module and assigning it the number of the FANUC standard program to
be changed (Super CAP II T only).
When user modules 1 and 2 have identical program numbers, that
specified in user module 2 takes priority.

F.4.5
Restrictions and Notes
on Developing the User
Module

(1) User modules 1 and 2 should not have identical user program
numbers. If the modules have identical program numbers, the
program specified in user module 2 takes priority.
(2) Identical compile parameters must be specified in user modules 1 and
2 (except for compile parameter 9000).
(3) The total size of user modules 1 and 2 must not exceed the following:
D Super CAP II T: 768K bytes
D Super CAP II M: 1.625M bytes
89

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

F.5
RESTRICTIONS
IMPOSED ON THE
SYSTEM

(1) The PCODE loading function cannot be used with modular CAP.
(2) No program can be executed with the user modules only. The CAP
control module is necessary.

90

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

F.6
CREATING SAMPLE
USER MODULES
FOR SUPER CAP II T

D Example
Create a 256Kbyte user module 1 and link it with the user programs
of CAPS and auxiliary processes. Create a 512Kbyte user module
2 and link it with a userdeveloped machining macro program.

F.6.1
Creating Programs

(1) Edit the string file (CAPS.SRC) to change the title of the Super CAP
T basic menu screen and the series and edition of the standard macro
displayed on the system configuration screen.
Character string of the series and edition of
D Before editing
the user program displayed on the conversa-

Several lines omitted


tional system configuration screen
/*
123456789012
;
N9998
(BB0H_ZZ)
;
/* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
N9999 (FANUC SUPER CAPIIT!)
Several lines
Character string displayed as the title of the Super
omitted
CAP T basic menu screen

D After editing
Several lines omitted
N9998 (ABCDEFG)
;
/* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
N9999 (DEBUG SYSTEM FOR SUPER CAP T!)
Several lines omitted

(2) Create user programs for auxiliary processes.


D O1004.SRC
D O1005.SRC
D O1006.SRC
(3) Create a machining macro program.
D USR_PRG.SRC

91

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

F.6.2

Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.

Creating Link Files

D Link file for user module 1 (F16ITP1.LNK)


/*
/* Conversation MACRO Sample program
LINK control file.
/*
/*
/* executer file FS16TI for VGA
/*
Macro library for user module 1
CNC =F16ITP1.MEX
SERN =USR1
Add these lines to the link file to display the
VERN =0001
series and edition of user module 1.
SYSTEM=TPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 P9009 and P9010 P9059
/*
P9000=10000100
Specify a size of 256K bytes.
P9001=10000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10001001
P9007=01000000
P9009=00000100
Common part shared by user programs 1
and 2
P9013=200
P9021=208
P9022=209
P9023=320
P9024=321
P9030=27
P9031=28
P9033=97
P9037=7
P9044=2044
P9038=4999
/*
/* Link files
/*
String file: The string file is also included in the
FILE=CAPS
Super CAP control module. A program speciFILE=O1004
fied in a user module takes priority.
FILE=O1005
FIEL=O1006

92

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

D Link file for user module 2 (F16TCP2.LNK)


/*
/*
Conversation MACRO Sample program
LINK control file.
/*

/*
/* executer file FS16TI for VGA
/*
Macro library for user module 2
CNC =F16ITP2.MEX
SERN =USR2
Add these lines to the link file to display the seVERN =0001
ries and edition of user module 2.
SYSTEM=TPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 P9009 and P9010 P9059
/*
Specify a size of 512K bytes.
P9000=10001000
P9001=10000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10001001
P9007=01000000
P9009=00000100
P9013=200
P9021=208
P9022=209
P9023=320
P9024=321
P9030=27
P9031=28
P9033=97
P9037=7
P9044=2044
P9038=4999
/*
/* Link files
/*
FILE=USR_PRG

Common part shared by user programs 1


and 2

After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD


to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created:
D F16ITP1.MEM: 256K bytes
D F16ITP2.MEM: 512K bytes

93

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

F.7
CREATING SAMPLE
USER MODULES
FOR SUPER CAP II M

D Example
Create a 1.375Mbyte user module 1 and link it with a conversational
macro program and C program. Create a 256Kbyte user module 2
and link it with a userdeveloped auxiliary macro program.

F.7.1
Creating Programs

(1) While referring to a FANUC standard macro program, create the


following conversational macro programs and conversational macro
definition tables:
D TL_AUTO.SRC
D FS_AUTO.SRC
D ZH_DATA.SRC
D ZH_MENU.SRC
D JPN_MENU.TBL
D ZH_PARA.TBL
(2) Create a required C program.
D CPROG.C
(3) Create an auxiliary macro program.
D AUX_PRG.SRC
NOTE
A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a
confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has
been signed.

94

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

F.7.2

Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.

Creating Link Files

D Link file for user module 1 (F16IMP1.LNK)


/*
/*
Conversation MACRO Sample program
LINK control file.
/*

Macro library for user module 1.


/*
If user module 1 is not linked
/* executer file FS16MI for VGA
with a C program, use
/*
F16IMP1.MEX.
CNC =F16IMP1C.MEX
SERN =USR1
Add these lines to the link file to display the series and
VERN =0001
edition of user module 1.
SYSTEM=MPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 P9009 and P9010 P9059
/v
P9000=10000000
The size is always 1.375M bytes and need not
P9001=00000001
be specified.
P9002=11000000
P9003=10000000
P9007=10000000
P9009=00000010
P9033=12
/*
/* Link files
/*
FILE=TL_AUTO
FILE=FS_AUTO
Conversational macro program
FILE=ZH_DATA
FILE=ZH_MENU
/*
/* Table Data
/*
TBL=JPN_MENU
Conversational macro definition table
TBL=ZH_PARA
/*
/* C Program
/*
C program (when linked)
HFILE=CPROG

95

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING


SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

D Link file for user module 2 (F16MCP2.LNK)


/*
/*
Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file.
/*

/*
/* executer file FS16MI for VGA
/*
Macro library for user module 2
CNC =F16IMP2.MEX
SERN =USR2
Add these lines to the link file to display the
VERN =0001
series and edition of user module 2.
SYSTEM=MPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 P9009 and P9010 P9059
/*
P9000=10000100
Specify a size of 256K bytes.
P9001=00000001
P9002=11000000
Common part shared by user programs
P9003=10000000
1 and 2
P9007=10000000
P9009=00000010
P9033=12
/*
/* Link files
/*
FILE=AUX_PRG

After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD


to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created:
D F16IMP1.MEM: 1.375M bytes
D F16IMP2.MEM: 256K bytes

96

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 20, 21-B,


0i-A)

G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
G.2 OPERATION AND
CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND
REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (Series 20) . . . . . 118
G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (Series 20) . . . 120

97

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

G.1
OUTLINE

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

The boot system of first loads the CNC system software (flash RAM !
DRAM), then starts execution of the CNC software so that other software
can be executed. (Some models run the CNC system software entirely in
flash memory or EPROM, without using DRAM.)
The CNC boot system supports the following system maintenance
functions:
(1) Registering a file in flash memory
Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card
conforming to JEIDA V4.1.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash memory
(3) Deleting a file from flash memory
(4) Batch saving of parameters, programs, and other files, powered by
battery (SRAM area), to a memory card and batch restoring of data
from the memory card
(5) Writing a file in flash memory to a memory card
(6) Formatting a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
operation and corresponding screen displays for the functions listed
above.

G.1.1
Starting the BOOT
SYSTEM

BOOT SYSTEM is automatically started when the CNC is powered on.


It then loads and starts the CNC system software. The user, therefore, can
usually ignore the operation of BOOT SYSTEM. When maintenance is
carried out or if flash memory does not contain a required file, however,
the boot system must be controlled from an on-screen menu.
(1) During system maintenance, for example, when a file in flash
memory is to be replaced
Operation: Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two
soft keys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

(2) If flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC
If the file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not found in flash
memory, or if that file is damaged, the BOOT SYSTEM menu is
automatically displayed when the CNC is powered on.

98

B66102E/10

G.1.2
System File and User
File

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

The boot system manages files in flash memory by dividing them into two
main groups: system files and user files. These two groups have the
following characteristics:

D System files

CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC

D User files

PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other


user-created files

99

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

G.2
OPERATION AND
CORRESPONDING
SCREENS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

When the boot system is started, the MAIN MENU screen appears. The
contents of this screen are described below:

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU







1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

10.

60M1 - 05

SYSTEM DATA LOADING


SYSTEM DATA CHECK
SYSTEM DATA DELETE
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
SRAM DATA BACKUP
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT

END
MESSAGE

SELECT MODE AND HIT [SELECT] KEY

[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system are indicated
at the right end.
: Function used to write data to flash memory
: Function used to check the edition of a file in ROM
: Function used to delete a file from flash memory
: Function used to make a backup of the data stored on a memory card
: Function used to make a backup of the data in SRAM

: Function used to delete a file from a memory card


: Function used to format a memory card
: Function used to terminate the boot system and start the CNC
: Brief guidance message or error message

D Operating procedure

Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After
positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft
key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation
from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

D Basic operation
Position the
cursor.
[UP]
[DOWN]

Select a
function
[SELECT]

Return to
original state

100

Check the
selection
[YES]
[NO]

Execute
the
Select END
function

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.1
System Data Loading
Screen
Description

This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card and
write it to flash memory.

Screen configuration


SYSTEM DATA LOADING


FILE DIRECTORY
B0A1E01.ROM
B0A1E02.ROM
END

MESSAGE
SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][

YES

][

1/1

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m) are
displayed in n/m format at the right end.
: Files on the memory card
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card into
flash memory. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
Up to eight file names can be listed on a single page. If nine or more
files are stored on the memory card, the ninth and subsequent files are
displayed on other pages. To display the next page, press the [ ] soft
key. To display the previous page, press the [ ] soft key. END is
displayed on the last page.
(2) When a file is selected, the system prompts the operator to confirm
loading of that file.
MESSAGE
LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]
key.
MESSAGE
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

101

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(4) When the function terminates normally, the system displays the
following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs,
see Appendix (B).
MESSAGE
LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
(a) Counter display while a file is being loaded
While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being
accessed is displayed.
MESSAGE
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
z
ADDRESS 001:000022FF



The counter is displayed under


the message field.

: Number of the 128-KB management unit where the data being


accessed is positioned in flash memory

: Relative address within the management unit (Only series 20 is


indicated.)

(b) File name in flash memory


The boot system uses the first four characters of the file name to
identify a file in flash memory. If the file to be read from a memory
card and a file already written into flash memory have names
beginning with the same four characters, delete the latter from flash
memory. Then, start reading the new file into flash memory. The
following table lists the names and contents of files.
File names may be changed without notice.
D Series 16/18
File name

Contents

NC BASIC
DG SERVO
GRAPHIC
NC OPTN

Basic
Servo
Graphic
Optional
PMC control software, etc.
P-CODE macro file/OMM
C-language executor
Ladder software
Loader ladder software

PMC
PCD
CEX
PMC-
PMC@

File type
System file
System file
System file
System file
System file
User file
User file
User file
User file

A square (j) and an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character and an


alphabetic character respectively.
D Series 20
File name

Contents

NC BASIC
DG SERVO
OPT LANG

Basic
Servo
Optional
P-CODE macro file/OMM
Ladder software

PCD
PMC-

File type
System file
System file
System file
User file
User file

An asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an alphabetic character


respectively.
102

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

D Series 21
File name

Contents

NC BASIC
DG SERVO
GRAPHIC
NC OPTN

Basic (:1)
Servo (:1)
Graphic (:1)
Optional (:1)
PMC control software, etc. (:1)
P-CODE macro file/OMM
Ladder software
Loader ladder software (:2)

PMC
PCD
PMC-
PMC@

File type
System file
System file
System file
System file
System file
User file
User file
User file

A square (j) or an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an


alphabetic character respectively.
(:1) : Only for 21MB and 21TB (controller B)
(:2) : Only for 21TB (controller B)

103

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.2
System Data Check
Screen
Description

This screen is used to list files in flash memory, together with the number
of 128-KB management units constituting each file and the series and
edition of the software.

Screen configuration



SYSTEM DATA CHECK


FILE DIRECTORY
1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RA ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 OPT LANG( 4)
END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title.
: Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name. The file names are given in item G.2.1(1).
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

104

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

Operation
(1) Select the file for which details are required. For example, select 1
NC BASIC.
(2) The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,
together with the series and edition of the software. After checking
the list, press the [SELECT] soft key and return to the file selection
screen.
ROM FILE CHECK
NC BASIC
0 B0A1 801A 000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

B0A1
B0A1
B0A1
B0A1
B0A1
B0A1
B0A1
B0A1

801A
802A
841A
842A
881A
882A
8C1A
8C2A

000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007

Internal management unit number


ROM number and edition
Series

MESSAGE
HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
D Parity information for system file and user file
The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, OPT LANG, and other system files in
flash memory contain parity information in each of their management
units. If the file name field or parity field on the check screen contains
a non-ASCII character or @, the flash ROM may be
damaged/destroyed or a damaged file may have been read. Re-read
data from the memory card.
The PMC-xxxx, PC-D xxxx, and other user files do not contain parity
information in each of their management units. A non-ASCII
character or @ may be included in the displayed series/edition
information. This does not, however, indicate any abnormality.

105

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.3
System Data Delete
Screen
Description

This screen is used to delete a user file from flash memory.

Screen configuration



SYSTEM DATA DELETE


FILE DIRECTORY
1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RB ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 OPT LANG( 4)
END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title.
: Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message:
MESSAGE
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To delete the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key.
MESSAGE
DELETE ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

(4) When the deletion terminates normally, the system displays the
following message. Press the [SELECT] key.
MESSAGE
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

106

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

Others
D System file and user file on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen
The SYSTEM DATA DELETE function provides a safeguard against
accidental deletion of the system files. User files, however, are not
protected. Protected system files can be overwritten by using the
SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.

107

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.4
System Data Save
Screen
Description

This screen is used to write a user file from flash memory to a memory
card. This function supports the writing of user files only. System files
cannot be written from flash memory to a memory card.

Screen configuration



SYSTEM DATA SAVE


FILE DIRECTORY
1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RB ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 NC1 OPTN( 4)
END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title.
: Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be saved, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message:
MESSAGE
SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To save the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key.
MESSAGE
WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA.000

108

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

(4) When saving terminates normally, the system displays the following
message. Press the [SELECT] key. The name of the file written to
the memory card is displayed. Check the file name.
MESSAGE
FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RB.000

Others
(1) Difference between a system file and user file for SYSTEM DATA
SAVE
SYSTEM DATA SAVE protects system files so that they cannot be
copied easily. User files are not protected.
(2) Names of saved files
The names of the files written from flash memory to the memory card
are as follows:
D Series 16/18
Flash memory
NC BASIC !
DG SERVO !
NC1 OPTN !
PMC-RB
!
PCD 0.5M !
PCD 1.0M !
PCD 1.5M !

Memory card
NC_BASIC.XXX
DG_SERVO.XXX
NC1_OPTN.XXX
PMCRB.XXX
PCD_0.5M.XXX
PCM_1.0M.XXX
PCD_1.5M.XXX

D Series 20
Flash memory
NC BASIC !
DG SERVO !
OPT LANG !
PMC-RA
!
PCD 0.5M !
PCD 1.0M !
PCD 1.5M !

Memory card
NC_BASIC.XXX
DG_SERVO.XXX
OPT_LANG.XXX
PMCRA.XXX
PCD_0.5M.XXX
PCM_1.0M.XXX
PCD_1.5M.XXX

D Series 21
Flash memory
NC BASIC !
DG SERVO !
NC1 OPTN !
PMC-RA
!
PCD 128k !
PCD 256k !
PCD 0.5M !
PCD 1.0M !

Memory card
NC_BASIC.XXX
DG_SERVO.XXX
NC1_OPTN.XXX
PMCRA.XXX
PCD_128k.XXX
PCD_256k.XXX
PCD_0.5M.XXX
PCM_1.0M.XXX

XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names.


One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. For
example, if a PMC-RB file in flash memory is saved to a memory card
containing no PMC_RB.* files, the saved file is named
PMC_RB.000. If that same file is saved to a memory card that
already contains a PMC_RB.000 file, however, it is named
PMC_RB.001. In this way, the extension is incremented by one, up
to PMC_RB.031. If there are any free extension numbers in the
sequence of the extension numbers, they are used in ascending order.
If two or more files having identical names but different extension
numbers are saved to a single memory card, check the file names
displayed after saving. In the case of Serics 20, to write a P-CODE
macro file, with a password assigned by MLINK, from flash memory
to a memory card, the password must be entered. The macro
password is explained in Sec.G.4.
109

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.5
SRAM Data Backup
Screen
Description

This screen is used for the batch saving and restoring of parameters,
programs, and other data to be retained after the CNC is turned off to/from
a memory card.

Screen configuration

Select 4 SRAM DATA BACKUP from the SYSTEM MONITOR


MAIN MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.


SYSTEM DATA BACKUP




1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD )


2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC )
END




SRAM SIZE
FILE NAME

:
:

512K( BASIC )
SRAM_5A.FDB

MESSAGE
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title.
: Menu
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC
: File name
: Message

Operation

[Backing up data]
(1) Select 1. SRAM BACKUP. The following confirmation message
is displayed. To back up the data, press the [YES] key.
MESSAGE
BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(2) The FILE NAME: field displays the name of the file that is being
written to the memory card. The writing time depends on the amount
of free space on the memory card. Generally, to write the SRAM
BASIC file (512KB) takes about 2 minutes.

SRAM SIZE : 0.5M( BASIC )


FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.000!MEMORY CARD

MESSAGE
SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

110

z Name of file that


is being backed
up.

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[Restoring data]
(1) Select 2. RESTORE SRAM. The system displays the following
message. Press the [YES] key.
MESSAGE
RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(2) The system displays the following message while the file is being
restored.
MESSAGE
RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
MESSAGE
RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
(1) Name of a backup file
The name of a backup file written to a memory card by the SRAM
backup function depends on the size of the SRAM in the CNC.
D Series 16/18
The backup file is divided every 512KB.
Size of SRAM

File
number

0.5MB

1.0MB

1.5MB

2.5MB

SRAM0_5A.FDB

SRAM1_0A.FDB

SRAM1_5A.FDB

SRAM2_5A.FDB

SRAM1_0B.FDB

SRAM1_5B.FDB

SRAM2_5B.FDB

2
3

SRAM1_5C.FDB SRAM2_5C.FDB

SRAM2_5D.FDB

SRAM2_5E.FDB

D Series 20, 21
Size of SRAM

File name on the memory card

128KB

SRAM128K.XXX

256KB

SRAM256K.XXX

256KB

SRAM256K.XXX

512KB

SRAM512K.XXX

CNC
Series 20
Series 21

XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names.


One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. The number
is assigned as described in the section describing the use of the
SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen. If two or more files are normally
saved, check the file names displayed after saving.
111

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.6
Memory Card File
Delete Screen
Description

This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.

Screen configuration



SYSTEM DATA LOADING


FILE DIRECTORY
B0A1E01.ROM
B0A1E02.ROM

1/1


END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

: Screen title. The current page number (n) and the total number of
pages (m) are displayed in n/m format at the right-hand end.
: Files on the memory card
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Select the name of the file to be deleted from the memory card by
pressing the [SELECT] key.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
MESSAGE
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) Upon normal deletion of the file, the system displays the following
message. Press the [SELECT] key.
MESSAGE
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
D When nine or more files are stored to the memory card
Display the desired page, by following the procedure in the section
describing the use of the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
112

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

G.2.7
Memory Card Format
Function
Description

This function is used to format a memory card. A memory card must be


formatted before it can be used for the first time or before it is to be re-used
after its data has been lost as a result of its battery failing or similar
reasons.

Operation
(1) On the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select 7.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
MESSAGE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) The system displays the following message while formatting a


memory card:
MESSAGE
FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

(4) Upon the completion of formatting, the system displays the following
message. Press the [SELECT] key.
MESSAGE
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

113

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.2.8
End of Boot System

Description

This function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.

Operation

On the MAIN MENU screen, select 9. END. The system displays the
ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO message. To terminate the boot
system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. If the [NO] key
is pressed, the boot system is not terminated.
MESSAGE
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

(1) After the [YES] soft key is pressed


D The system checks the NC BASIC system file in flash memory. At
this time, the system displays the following message:
MESSAGE
CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

D If the NC BASIC system file is normal, the system reads the system
file into DRAM (for Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, or 20) then starts the NC
basic system. During reading, the following message blinks:
MESSAGE
LOADING BASIC TO DRAM
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

D Upon the completion of loading, the following message appears,


after which NC BASIC starts.
MESSAGE
CNC DATA LOADED
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

D If the contents of the NC BASIC system file have been damaged or


destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection screen, in
the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.
(2) If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing
selection screen, shown below:
MESSAGE
SELECT MENU AND HIT [SELECT] KEY.
[ SELECT ][

114

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.3
ERROR MESSAGES
AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS

The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical


order.

Message
D

Description and required action

DELETE ERROR.
HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash
ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the
flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)

Cause

An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the
flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce
the flash ROM module.

DRAM OR SRAM PARITY

Cause

Invalid data was found in the RAM area.

Action

If an attempt is made to back RAM that has never been


cleared, this message appears. When this happens, the boot
system may stop.

FILE SAVE ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.

Action

Check that the memory card is not damaged. (NOTE)

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE

Cause

There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file.


Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.

Action

For the Series 20, if this message is displayed and a file cannot be read although the result of calculation indicates that
the flash memory has enough space, see Section G.5, Free
Area of the Flash Memory.

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause


HIT SELECT.
Action

The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system.


Put the flash ROM module on the board.

FORMAT ERROR.
HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The formatting of the memory card failed.

Action

Only a memory card of the SRAM type can be used.


Check whether the memory card used is of the flash memory
type.

ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE

Cause

The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.

Action

The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed.

Cause

Error in the password specification

Action

Key in the correct password.

Cause

An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.

Action

Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

INCORRECT PASSWORD

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

LOADING ERROR.
HIT SELECT KEY.

NOTE
Check that the memory cards battery is not exhusted, that
its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely
inserted into its slot.

115

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

Message
M

MAX EXTENSION OVER.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Description and required action


Cause

The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.

Action

Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause


HIT SELECT.
Action

The memory cards battery is exhausted.


Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is full.

Action

Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another card having sufficient free space.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY

Cause

The memory card could not be accessed.

Action

Check that the memory card is normal.

MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is not inserted into its slot.

Action

Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause


SELECT KEY.

B66102E/10

Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write


inhibit switch is set.

Action

Disable the write inhibit switch.

MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to a memory card failed.

Action

The memory cards battery may have gone dead, the memory
card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory
card may not be inserted in the slot securely.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to the memory card has failed.

Action

Check whether the memory card is defective.

NMI OCCURRED.
PLEASE POWER OFF.

Cause

A hardware or software error occurred.

Action

Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report


it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot
software.

ROM PARITY ERROR:


NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.

Cause

The NC BASIC is parity error.

Action

Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM


DATA CHECK.

116

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Message
S

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

Description and required action

SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.

Action

Check that the memory card is normal.

SRAMXXXX * NOT FOUND.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

A backup file of the SRAM with a capacity of XXX cannot be


found.

Action

A backup file is required for restoration.

Cause

A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM


(Caution).

Action

The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment


from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If,
however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or
it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup battery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area.
If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there
is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use
the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity
error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hardware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not accessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any problems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however,
reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be detected during backup although the CNC operates without any
problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of
the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up
using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, however, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recommended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy
cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then
the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is performed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use
the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.

SRAM PARITY OCCURRED.


PLEASE POWER OFF.

117

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.4
SETTING A MACRO
PASSWORD
(Series 20)
G.4.1
Overview

The Series 20 can easily read a file from flash memory and write it to a
memory card. Security for the P-CODE file of a user-created macro
executor is important. Assigning a password to the P-CODE file at a link
(MLINK) affords security against the unauthorized reading of that file.
MLINK of personal computer compiler V02.3 or later, which supports a
function for specifying a password is used to achieve this.

G.4.2
Password

Specify a single five-digit password, each of the digits being from 1 to 5.


A number greater than or equal to 6 or 0 cannot be specified for the
password. Only five digits can be specified. If passwords are not used,
avoid coding PASS= in the MLINK link control file, described later.
Characters that can be specified: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Number of digits: 5
If a password that does not satisfy these requirements is specified, the
system displays the following error message:
ERROR: Illegal parameter is specified:PASS=XXXXX
The system stops MLINK processing.

118

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

G.4.3
Setting a Password

Specify a password in the MLINK link control file (extension .LNK). The
five digits immediately subsequent to PASS= constitute the password.
In the example below, the password is 15243.
(Example)
/:
/:

MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE


(SAMPLE)

/:
/:
CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F20M.MEX
/:
P9001=0000001
P9010=100
P9037=5
P9038=8000
/: JIKKOU-MACRO
FILE=ABC,DEF
FILE=XYZ,UVW
/:
FILE=SSS
/: P-CODE FILE PASSWORD
PASS=15243

G.4.4
Specifying a Password
for the Series 20 Boot
System

The Series 20 boot system can read a macro executor P-CODE file having
the password from flash memory only when the password is entered.
INPUT PASSWORD. ?????
The system displays the message and assigns numbers 1 to 5 to the soft
keys. When a valid password is entered, the P-CODE file can be written
to a memory card.

<

zSoft key indications

>

119

zSoft keys

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

G.5
FREE AREA IN
FLASH MEMORY
(Series 20)

G.5.1
Determining the Cause
of the Nospace State

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

When the NO SPACE message is displayed, flash memory is in one of the


following two states:
(1) Flash memory is fully occupied.
(2) Flash memory contains files in non-contiguous areas.
In flash memory, only continuous free areas are recognized as free areas.
Non-contiguous free areas may be ignored as described in (2) above.

Using the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen, check the capacity of the
flash memory module installed in the Series 20.
Module size

Number of management units

2MB

16

3MB

24

4MB

32

Total the number of management units constituting the files in flash


memory and subtract the total from the number of management units
corresponding to the capacity of the installed flash memory module.

Number of free management units=


Number of management units corresponding Total number of management
to module capacity
unitsconstituting all files

The number of management units constituting each file is given in


following table.
File name

Number of
management units

Contents

NC BASIC

Basic

10

OPT LANG

Option

DG SERVO

Servo

PMC-RA

Lodder

PCD 0.5M

P-CODE macro file (0.5M byte)

PCD 1.0M

P-CODE macro file (1.0M byte)

PCD 1.5M

P-CODE macro file (1.5M byte)

12

If a NO SPACE error message is displayed even though calculation


indicates that flash memory contains sufficient free management units,
then the free area in flash memory is non-contiguous. For example, if the
files are read to a 3MB flash memory module (24 management units) in
the order in which they are listed below, the module will have four free
management units.

24

Number of management
units in the module

120

20
Total number of
management units used

4
Number of free
management units

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16B/C,


18B/C, 20, 21B, 0iA)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RA

( 1)

4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 OPT LANG( 4)

The files are written into the 3MB flash memory module as shown below:
Before deletion (continuous free area)

Management unit
number

After deletion (non-continuous free areas)

Management unit
number

File

000

File

000
:

NC BASIC
:

009

NC BASIC

10

009

NC BASIC

10

010

DG SERVO

010

DG SERVO

011

PMC-RA

011

PMC-RA

012

PCD 0.5M

012

Free

013

PCD 0.5M

013

Free

014

PCD 0.5M

014

Free

015

PCD 0.5M

015

Free

016

OPT LANG

016

OPT LANG

017

OPT LANG

017

OPT LANG

018

OPT LANG

018

OPT LANG

019

OPT LANG

019

OPT LANG

020

Free

020

Free

021

Free

020

Free

022

Free

020

Free

023

Free

020

Free

NC BASIC

Noncontiguous
free areas

If P-CODE macro file PCD 0.5M is deleted, eight management units (1MB)
become free in flash memory. As the free management units are separated
in flash memory, the 1-MB P-CODE macro file PCD 1.0M cannot be read
into flash memory. (Use the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen to determine
whether the management unit numbers of the files are contiguous.)
If non-contiguous free areas are found, use the SYSTEM DATA SAVE
function to save the OPT LANG file, sandwiched between two free areas,
to a memory card. Then, delete the OPT LANG file from flash memory.
Re-read the file from the memory card into flash memory. The file will
now be placed next to the PMC-RA file, with a continuous free area of
1MB reserved.
NOTE
The OPT LANG system file is deleted in this example only
for ease of explanation. Actually, the user cannot delete a
system file.

121

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

122

B66102E/10

H.1
OVERVIEW

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAMDRAM),
then starts it so that software can be executed.
The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in flash ROM
Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM
(3) Deleting a file from flash ROM
(4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card
(5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card
(6) Formatting of a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.
CAUTION
This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an
input/output device. When a flash card is used, however,
data can be written to a FANUCrecommended card only.
Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM
card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note
that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced
by 128KB.
See the order list for details of the supported memory card
types.

H.1.1
Starting the Boot
System

In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers


files from flash ROM to DRAM in the background.
The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system must
be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to be
carried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file.
1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM
Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft
keys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

If soft keys are not provided (for example, when a touch pad is being
used), use the MDI numeric keys. Hold down the 6
keys until the boot system screen appears.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

123

and 7

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the
CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a
file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or has
been destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.

H.1.2
System Files and User
Files

The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups :
system files and user files. These two file types have the following
characteristics :

D System files

CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC

D User files

PMC sequence program (ladder), PCODE macro program, and other


usercreated files

H.1.3

When CAPII board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the


CNC, we have to access to SRAM that mounted on additional board. So,
the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen that
to select a access board.

Boot Slot
Configuration Screen
D Screen configuration

(1)
(2)

(3)

BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION


NO.
0.
1.
2.
3.

BOARD
MAIN
PMCRE
CAPII
LCB

FROM
4MB
6MB

60M102

SRAM
1.0MB
256KB
512KB
512KB

MESSAGE
SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title.


(2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board.
(3) : Message
D Operation

Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select board
to press the [SELECT] soft key.

124

H.2
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION
AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :

D MAIN MENU screen


(1)

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

(9)

10.END

(10)

MESSAGE

60M1-01

SYSTEM DATA LOADING


SYSTEM DATA CHECK
SYSTEM DATA DELETE
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
SRAM DATA BACKUP
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT

SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.


[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear at
the right end.
(2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM.
(3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM.
(4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM.
(5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memory
card.

(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM.


(7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card.
(8) : Function for formatting a memory card.
(9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC.
(10): Condensed guidance or error message
D Operating procedure

Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After
positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft
key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation
from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

D Basic operation

Position the
cursor.
[UP]
[DOWN]

Select a
function
[SELECT]

Return to
original state

125

Check the
selection
[YES]
[NO]

Execute
the
Select END
function

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H.2.1
System Data Loading
Screen
D Description

This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into
flash ROM.

D Screen configuration

(1)

SYSTEM DATA LOADING

(2)

FILE DIRECTORY
B1F1A_B.MEM
B1F1A_AI.MEM
END

(3)

1/1

MESSAGE
(4)

SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.


[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m)
are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure

1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card and
written to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory card
contains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed on
another page.
To display the next page, press the
To display the previous page, press the
is displayed on the last page.

soft key.
soft key. The END option

The END option is displayed on the last page.


2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to be
loaded.
MESSAGE
LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

126

B66102E/10

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]
key.
MESSAGE
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see D.3
MESSAGE
LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

D Others
1 Counter display while a file is being loaded
While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being
accessed is displayed.
MESSAGE
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
ADDRESS 001:
The counter appears under the
message fild.
(1)
(1) : Number of 128KB management unit in flash ROM
2 File name in flash ROM
The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first four
characters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the same
type as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROM
is deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The following
table lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDs
are subject to change without prior notice.
File name
NC BASIC
DG SERVO
GRAPHIC
NCj OPTN
PMCj
PDjjjj
P1jjjj
P2jjjj
CEX
PMC -
PMC@

Contents
Basic
Servo
Graphic
Optional
PMC control software, etc.
1st executor
2nd executor
3rd executor
Clanguage executor
(Except Series 21i)
Ladder software
Ladder software for the loader

File type
System file
System file
System file
System file
System file
User file
User file
User file
User file
User file
User file

V : A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character

127

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

3 File name of the executor system software


The Series 16i/18i/21iA has separate executor system software for
path 1, path 2, and the loader. All the software is stored in the flash
ROM of the first path.
Under twopath control with the Series 16C and the like, a common
executor system software file name (PCD1.0M, for example) is used
for different paths. The Series 16i/18i/21i, however, use separate file
names for different paths.
Accordingly, keyword SYSTEM has been added to the link control
file of the macro compiler. (See Section 4.2, Macro Linker.)
The following format is used for the file name in the flash ROM.
(1) Format of the file name in the flash ROM
Format
PDpath-number attribute size
Standard : Depends on
the compile
parameter
SCAP : A fixed
value is
embedded.
M : M series
T : T series
L : Loader

First executor
(Standard/Super
CAP)

1 : First path
2 : Second path
P1path-number attribute size
Depends on the compile parameter
Second executor
(Super CAP only)

M : M series
T : T series
1 : First path
2 : Second path
P2path-number attribute size
Depends on the compile parameter

Third executor
(Super CAP only)

M : M series
T : T series
1 : First path
2 : Second path

(2) File name types in the flash ROM


FROM file name

Description

PD1Msize
PD2Msize

First path of M series (first executor)


Second path of M series (first executor)

PD1Tsize
PD2Tsize

First path of T series (first executor)


Second path of T series (first executor)

PD1Lsize

First path of loader

P11Msize
P12Msize

First path of M series (second executor)


Second path of M series (second executor)

P21Msize
P22Msize

First path of M series (third executor)


Second path of M series (third executor)

P11Tsize
P12Tsize

First path of T series (second executor)


Second path of T series (second executor)

P21Tsize
P22Tsize

First path of T series (third executor)


Second path of T series (third executor)

128

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.2
System Data Check
Screen
D Description

This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the
corresponding numbers of 128KB management units in each file and the
series and edition of the software.

D Screen configuration
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

SYSTEM DATA CHECK


[BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMCRB
( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
END

1/1

MESSAGE
(5)

SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.


[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message

129

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

D Operating procedure

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select 1 NC
BASIC (10).
2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,
together with the series and edition of the software in each
management unit. After checking the listed data, select the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen.
ROM FILE CHECK
NC BASIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

B1F1
B1F1
B1F1
B1F1
B1F1
B1F1
B1F1
B1F1

801A
802A
841A
842A
881A
882A
8C1A
8C2A

000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007

MESSAGE

0 B1F1 801A 000

Internal managementunit
number
ROM number and edition
Series

HIT SELECT KEY.

D Others

Parity information for the system file and user file


The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, and other system files in flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name field
or parity field on the check screen contains a nonASC II character or an
@ , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file may
have been read. Reread the data from the memory card.
The PMCRB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parity
information in each management unit. A nonASCII character or an @
may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not
indicate that the file has been damaged.

130

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.3
System Data Delete
Screen
D Description

This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.

D Screen configuration

(4)

SYSTEM DATA CHECK


[BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMCRB
( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
END

(5)

MESSAGE

(1)
(2)
(3)

SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.


[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

1/1

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message
D Operating procedure

1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :
MESSAGE
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
MESSAGE
DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] key.
MESSAGE
DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

131

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

D Others

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen


The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be
overwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.

H.2.4
System Data Save
Screen
D Description

This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card.
Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. System
files cannot be saved.

D Screen configuration
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

(5)

SYSTEM DATA SAVE


[BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMCRB
( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message

132

D Operating procedure

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.

The system displays the following confirmation message :


MESSAGE
SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].


MESSAGE
WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

When saving terminates normally, the system displays the


following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files
written to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, for
example, making a note of the list.
MESSAGE
FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

D Others

1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen


The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against free
copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
2 Names of saved files
Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the following
names :
Flash ROM

File name in
Memory card

PMCRB
PD1M 0.5
P12T 1.0
CEX1.0M
CEX 2.0M

PMC_RB. XXX
PD1M 05.XXX
P12T 10.XXX
CEX_10M.XXX
CEX_20M.XXX

XXX corresponds to the file extension of MSDOS format files. A


number from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if the
PMCRB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yet
contain a file whose name begins with PMCRB, the saved file is
named PMCRB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card that
already contains a file named PMCRB.000, the saved file is named
PMCRB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to a
maximum of PMCRB.031. Any nolonger used numbers in the
sequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If two
or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are
normally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayed
subsequently.
133

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H.2.5
SRAM Data Backup
Screen
D Description

This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs,


and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to
and from a memory card.

D Screen configuration

Select 4 SRAM DATA BACKUP on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN


MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)

(1) :
(2) :
(3) :
(4) :
(5) :
(6) :
(7) :

SRAM DATA BACKUP


[BOARD:MAIN]
1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC MEMORY CARD)
2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD CNC)
END
SRAM SIZE
FILE NAME

:
:

256K (BASIC)
SRAM256A. FDB

MESSAGE
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

Screen title
Names of accessing board
Menu
Returning to the previous menu
Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC
File name
Message

134

][

DOWN

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

D Operating procedure
[Backing up data]

1 Select 1. SRAM BACKUP. The following confirmation message is


displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the
SRAM capacity.
2 Press [YES] to start backup.
MESSAGE
BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be prompted


to confirm whether to permit overwriting.
4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed in
the FILE NAME: field.
SRAM SIZE
FILE NAME

: 0.5MB (BASIC)
: SRAM0_5A.FDB MEMORY CARD

MESSAGE

Name of the file being


saved

SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
MESSAGE
SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[Restoring the data]

1 Select 2. RESTORE SRAM. The system displays the following


message. Press the [YES] key.
MESSAGE
RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

2 The system displays the following message during restoration.


MESSAGE
RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
MESSAGE
RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

135

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

D Others

B66102E/10

1 Name of backup file


The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM
backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the
CNC.
When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in
units of 512 KB.

Number
of
files
SRAM
size

256KB

SRAM256A.FDB

0.5MB

SRAM0_5A.FDB

1.0MB

SRAM1_0A.FDB

SRAM1_0B.FDB

2.0MB

SRAM2_0A.FDB

SRAM2_0B.FDB

SRAM2_0C.FDB

SRAM2_0D.FDB

3.0MB

SRAM3_0A.FDB

SRAM3_0B.FDB

SRAM3_0C.FDB

SRAM3_0D.FDB

SRAM3_0E.FDB

SRAM3_0F.FDB

The backup file for SRAM on the PMCRE, CAPII, or LCB board
will have the following extension:
Board

MAIN

PMCRE

CAPII

LCB

Extension

FDB

PMC

CAP

LCB

CAUTION
If data such as parameters was restored from a memory
card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder,
set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set the
reference point again.

136

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.6
Memory Card File
Delete Screen
D Description

This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.

D Screen configuration
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

SRAM DATA LOADING


FILE DIRECTORY
B1F1A_B.MEM
B1F1A_A1.MEM
END

1/1

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total number
of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to the previous menu
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure

1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deleted
from the memory card.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
MESSAGE
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message.
Press the [SELECT] key.
MESSAGE
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

137

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H.2.7
Memory Card Format
Function
D Description

This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be


formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be
reused after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example,
battery failure.

D Operating procedure

1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select 7.


MEMORY CARD FORMAT.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message.
Press the [YES] key.
MESSAGE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 The system displays the following message during formatting :


MESSAGE
FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
D following message.
D Press the [SELECT] key.
MESSAGE
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

138

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

H.2.8
Load Basic System
Function
D Description

The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.

D Operating procedure

From the MAIN MENU screen, select 9. END. The system displays
the ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu.
MESSAGE
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

1 After pressing the [YES] soft key


The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. The
system displays the following message :
MESSAGE
CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the system


sends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. During
loading, the system blinks the following message.
MESSAGE
LOADING BASIC TO DRAM
[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have been
damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection
state, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.
2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing
selection state as shown below :
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

60M1-01

SYSTEM DATA LOADING


SYSTEM DATA CHECK
SYSTEM DATA DELETE
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
SRAM DATA BACKUP
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT

10.END

MESSAGE
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

139

][

DOWN

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.3
ERROR MESSAGES
AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS

APPENDIX

The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical


order.

Message
B

BOOT ROM PARITY.


PLEASE POWER OFF.

Description and required action


Cause

The contents of flash memory containing boot software was


destroyed.

Action

Replace the CPU card.

Cause

The memory card becomes full in the middle of SRAM backup


operation.

Action

Replace the card with a memory card containing enough free


space.

DELETE ERROR.
HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash
ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the
flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)

Cause

An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the
flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce
the flash ROM module.

Cause

An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.

Action

Check that the memory card is not damaged.

Note)

Check that the memory cards battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.

CHANGE MEMORY CARD.


AND HIT YES OR NO.

FILE SAVE ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE

Cause

There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file.

Action

Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause


HIT SELECT.
Action
I

B66102E/10

ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE

The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system.


Put the flash ROM module on the board.

Cause

The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.

Action

The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed.

ILLEGAL FROM MODULE.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The flash ROM module ID is illegal.

Action

Check the drawing No. of the flash ROM module.

ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The SRAM module ID is illegal.

Action

Check the drawing No. of the SRAM module.

LOADING ERROR.
HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.

Action

Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

140

Message
M

MAX EXTENSION OVER.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Description and required action


Cause

The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.

Action

Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause


HIT SELECT.
Action

The memory cards battery is exhausted.


Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is full.

Action

Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another card having sufficient free space.

MEMORY CARD IS NOT


AVAILABLE. HIT SEL.

Cause

The use of this memory card is not supported.

Action

Use only FANUCrecommended memory cards, as described in the order list.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY

Cause

The memory card could not be accessed.

Action

Check that the memory card is normal.

MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is not inserted into its slot.

Action

Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause


SELECT KEY.

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write


inhibit switch is set.

Action

Disable the write inhibit switch.

Note)

Check that the memory cards battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.

MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOT Cause


AVAILABLE.

Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory


card.

Action

Use only the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC.


Recommended flash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.

MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to a memory card failed.

Action

The memory cards battery may have gone dead, the memory
card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory
card may not be inserted in the slot securely.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to the memory card has failed.

Action

Check whether the memory card is defective.

Note)

Check that the memory cards battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.

NMI OCCURRED.
PLEASE POWER OFF.

Cause

A hardware or software error occurred.

Action

Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report


it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot
software.

PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE Cause


CARD.HIT SEL.

It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM


card, due to the characteristics of the memory used.

Action

To delete a file it is necessary to delete all files on the card, by


using the FORMAT function.

141

H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

APPENDIX

Message
R

B66102E/10

Description and required action

ROM PARITY ERROR:


NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.

Cause

The NC BASIC is parity error.

Action

Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM


DATA CHECK.

SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR.


HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.

Action

Check that the memory card is normal.

Note)

Check that the memory cards battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.

Cause

A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM


(Caution).

Action

The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment


from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If,
however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or
it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup battery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area.
If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there
is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use
the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity
error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hardware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not accessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any problems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however,
reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be detected during backup although the CNC operates without any
problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of
the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up
using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, however, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recommended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy
cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then
the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is performed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use
the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.

SRAM PARITY OCCURRED.


PLEASE POWER OFF.

142

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16-B/C,


18-B/C, 21-TA, Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B)

143

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

I.1
OUTLINE

The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a


personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function
also supports writing to flash ROM (exclude of Series 21TA).
The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface.
The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file
(loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The
parameters must be specified prior to loading.
When the CNC is turned off then back on by simultaneously pressing the
CAN

and

PROG

MDI keys, this function displays the specialized data

transfer screen (loading screen). If Series 16/18B/C having twopath


control is used, the loading screen is displayed after tool post 1 or 2 is
selected from the tool post selection screen. Data can be transferred only
when the loading screen is displayed.
Specify data transfer from the PC. For details of the transfer command,
see Section 4.3.
While this function is being executed, the CNC power-on sequence is
halted. While the specialized data transfer screen or loading screen is
displayed, the CNC is disabled. This function requires the executor
function and reader/punch control function.

144

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

I.2
PROCESSING BY
PCODE LOADER
FUNCTION

(1)

RAM initialization screen

(2)

Loading start screen

(3)

Loading screen

(4)

Loading end screen

(5)

Flash ROM transfer screen (exclude of 21TA)

(6)

Flash ROM transfer end screen (exclude of 21TA)

I.2.1
Starting the P-code
Loader Function

(1) The communication parameters for loading depend on the parameters


specified for the CNC. Specify the channel to be used, the baud rate,
and any other necessary parameters beforehand.
(2) Turn off the power of the CNC. Connect the CNC to the PC via the
RS-232C interface.
(3) Simultaneously pressing the

CAN

and

PROG

MDI keys of the CNC

turns the CNC on. Keep these keys held down until the MACRO
COMPILER/EXECUTOR P-CODE LOADER title appears on the
screen.

145

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

I.2.2
RAM Initialization
Screen

When a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection
screen is displayed subsequent to the title screen, as shown below.
By pressing the M or S address key, select path 1 or 2.
If the 0 key is pressed, P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the
Series 16/18B/C system is activated.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

LOADING PATH 1 : YES (PUSH M KEY)


LOADING PATH 2 : YES (PUSH S KEY)
LOADING END
: YES (PUSH 0 KEY)

Series with two-path control is being used

When a system other than Series with two-path control is used, the
following screen is displayed. The macro executor RAM is initialized.
If a Series with two-path control is used, the following screen is displayed
after either path is selected. Then, the macro executor RAM is initialized.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
PATH 1/PATH 2
(I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(MAPPING - 1MB)

OMM D-RAM INITIALIZE

146

z This line is displayed only for two


path control. The same applies to
the subsequent screens.

B66102E/10

I.2.3

APPENDIX

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

After the RAM is initialized, the screen for starting loading is displayed.

Loading Start Screen


MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

LOADING READY ? : YES (PUSH 1 KEY)

Once the PC is ready for data transfer, press the 1 key. The system enters
the loading wait state.
After this screen has been displayed, execute the data transfer command
on the PC, then start data transfer.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

147

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR000000H:00
(MAPPING - 1MB)

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

I.2.4
Loading Screen

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as
shown below.
Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together
with its address, are displayed.
For Series except 21TA, an asterisk corresponds to about 16K bytes
for DRAM areas of up to 2M bytes or about 32K bytes for DRAM areas
of up to 3M bytes. For Series 21-TA, an asterisk corresponds to about
8K bytes.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

148

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

I.2.5
Loading End Screen

This screen indicates whether loading has terminated normally.


(Normal termination)
(1) Except Series 21TA
Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxxBYTES


LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? :YES(1)/NO(CAN)
YES (PUSH 1 KEY) / NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

: Writing to flash ROM is started.


NO (PUSH CAN KEY) : The processing is terminated.
Specify whether to start writing to the flash ROM.
To start transferring data from RAM to the flash ROM, press the 1 key.
(See Subsec. I.2.6.)
If the (CAN) MDI key is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
YES (PUSH 1 KEY)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER


(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

PUSH 1 KEY: CNC START WITH EXECUTER

When the 1 key is pressed, the P-CODE loader function is terminated and
the CNC is started.
If a Series with two-path control is being used, the following message is
displayed.
To return to the path selection screen, press the 1 key.
149

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER


HEAD 1
(I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0
(MAPPING - 1MB)

I/O UNIT
= 0
BAUDRATE
=11

STOP BIT
= 1
INPUT CODE
= 1

PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION

(2) For the 21-TA


Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears.
Pressing the 1 key on this screen causes the P-CODE loader
processing to be terminated and the CNC to be started.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
HEAD 1
(I/O PARAMETERS)
(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0
(MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT
= 0

BAUDRATE
=11

STOP BIT
= 1
INPUT CODE
= 1

PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER

If an error occurs during loading, the following error message is


displayed.
To retry loading, press the 1 key. (The processing is repeated, starting
from RAM initialization.)
When you press CAN key and numeric 1 key on the MDI keyboard, the
P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the CNC is started.
If a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection screen
is displayed again.

150

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(Abnormal termination)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(ERROR OCCURED)
ILLEGAL CHARACTER

LOADING RESTART ?

: YES (PUSH 1 KEY)


: NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

: Re-loading into RAM is started.


: The processing is terminated.
Specify whether to start re-loading into RAM.
If the executor or reader/punch control function is not selected, the
following message is displayed.
YES (PUSH 1 KEY)
NO

(PUSH CAN KEY)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER


(I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING


I/O OPTION NOTHING
I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING
PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START

Press the 1 key to terminate the P-CODE loader processing and start the
CNC.

151

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

I.2.6
Flash ROM Transfer
Screen (Except Series
21)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

While data is being transferred from RAM to the flash ROM, the
following screen is displayed:
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING

While data is being written to flash ROM, the EXECUTING message


blinks.

152

B66102E/10

I.2.7
Flash ROM Transfer
End Screen (Except
Series 21)

APPENDIX

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

This screen indicates whether the data transfer to flash ROM terminated
normally.
(Normal termination)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE


PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER

Press the 1 key to terminate P-CODE processing and start the CNC.
If a Series with twopath control is being used, the following message is
displayed.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE


PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION

Press the 1 key to return to the path selection screen.


If an attempt to load data into flash ROM fails, the following error
message is displayed.
To start re-loading into flash ROM, press the 1 key.
Press the CAN key and then 1 key on the MDI keyboard to terminate the
P-CODE loader processing and start the CNC. The P-CODE previously
loaded into DRAM is effective.
If a Series with two-path control is being used, the tool post selection
screen is displayed again.
153

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(Abnormal termination)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

= 0
= 0
=11
= 1
= 1

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

(ERROR OCCURED)
UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED

LOADING RESTART ?

: YES(PUSH 1 KEY)
: NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

: Re-loading into flash ROM is started.


: The processing is terminated.
Specify whether to start re-loading into the flash ROM.
YES (PUSH 1 KEY)
NO

(PUSH CAN KEY)

154

B66102E/10

I.2.8
Notes

APPENDIX

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

(1) The Series except 21TA uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and
output during loading. The Series except 21TA cannot use another
channel for loading. The Series 21-TA use channel 1.
(2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not
supported.
The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether
ASCII or ISO data is being used.
(3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the
RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters
cannot be specified using the loading screen.
(4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading
is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether
both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the
P-CODE section is transferred.
(5) When no data is written to the FLASH ROM or data is deleted from
the FLASH ROM, set the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so
that the data including the executor section is loaded.

155

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

I.3
PARAMETER

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
0020

I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I / O C H A N N E L

Setting Entry
[Data type]
: Byte
[Data range]
: 0 to 3
Select an I/ O device used.
0 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
1 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
2 : Select a device connected to channel 2. (Except Series 21TA)
(I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD)
I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2.
NOTE
The Series 21-TA use channel 1.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0101

[Data type]
SB2
ASI

#3

#2

ASI

#1

#0
SB2

: Bit
: Number of stop bits:
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
: Input data code:
0 : ISO
1 : ASCII

NOTE
EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER.
Address
0102

Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)

[Data type]
: Byte
Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according
to Table 1.
Table 1
Set value

Specification of I/O device

0
1
2
3

RS232C
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
Unused
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL G
FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H

4
5
6

Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER.


156

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
0103

Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)

[Data type]
: Byte
Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2.
Table 2
Set

Baud rate

Set

50

100

3
4

Baud rate

Set

Baud rate

20

2400

300

10

4800

110

600

11

9600

150

1200

12

19200

Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P-CODE LOADER.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0111

#3

#2

#1

ASI

#0
SB2

[Data type]
: Bit
These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit
is the same as parameter No. 0101.
Address
0112

Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)

[Data type]
: Byte
Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1
according to Table 1.
Address
0113

Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )

[Data type]
: Byte
Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2.
Bit No.
Address

#7

0121

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

ASI

#1

#0
SB2

[Data type]
: Bit
These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each
bit is the same as parameter No. 101.
Address
0122

Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)

[Data type]
: Byte
Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2
according to Table 1.

157

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
0123

Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=2 )

[Data type]
: Byte
Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

8701

[Data type]
PLD

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1
PLD

: Bit
: P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer
0 : Clears RAM and rewrites all contents.
1 : Do not clear RAM and overwrites it.

158

#0

I. PCODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 16B/C, 18B/C,
21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA/B)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

I.4
ALARMS
Message
EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING OR NO
SPACE IN D-RAM

Meaning
Possible causes are as follows:
1) No macro executor option has been selected.
2) No macro capacity option has been selected.
3) An area of the capacity specified with the macro capacity option cannot
be allocated in D-RAM.
4) The area allocated with the macro capacity option is being used by the C
executor.

I/O OPTION NOTHING

Reader/puncher control 1 option is not selected.

I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING

Reader/puncher control 2 option is not selected.

ILLEGAL CHANNEL

A channel other than channel 1 and 2 is selected.

ILLEGAL CHARACTER

Transferred data is not correct.

OVERRUN

Overrun error.

FRAMING ERROR

Framing error.

DSR SIGNAL OFF

Communication error.

PARITY ERROR

Data with no parity was transferred.

CHECK SUM ERROR

Check sum error.

MEXE NOT FOUND

No executer part exists. Execute loading including executer part.

FILE SIZE OVER

The size of P-CODE to be loaded exceeds the size of D-RAM.

HEADER NOT FOUND

There is no header that is used for writing data in F-ROM. There may be no
-s instruction in transfer command.

UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT


MOUNTED

F-ROM module is unknown or not mounted.

ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION

F-ROM file ID is incorrect.

NO SPACE

There is no space in F- ROM module.

ERASE ERROR

Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

PROGRAM ERROR

Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

159

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)

The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a


personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function
also supports writing to flash ROM.
The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface.
The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file
(loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The
parameters must be specified prior to loading.
Display an IPL menu by turning on the power while pressing the two most
lefthand soft keys. The P-code loader function can be executed on the IPL
menu.

Press and hold down these two soft keys.

160

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

J.1
IPL MENU
FS20 IPL MENU
1
2
END

FILE CLEAR
P CODE LOADER

MESSAGE
SELECT ITEM AND HIT [SELECT] KEY.
[

UP

][

DOWN

][

][

][ SELECT ]

(a) Select a mode by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN] soft keys, then
press the [SELECT] soft key.
1.

FILE CLEAR

: Clears files such as offsets and


programs
2.
P CODE LOADER : Loads ROM-format files (P-CODE
files). If no reader/punch control
option is provided, the P-code
loader menu is not displayed.
END
: Terminate IPL processing and starts
the system

161

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

J.2
PROCESSING FLOW
FOR THE PCODE
LOADER FUNCTION

J.2.1
RAM Initializing Menu

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

The P-CODE loader function performs processing as follows. At each


step the appropriate menu is displayed.
(a) RAM initializing menu
#
(b) Loading start menu
#
(c) Loading menu
#
(d) Loading end menu
#
(e) Menu for transferring data into flash ROM memory
#
(f) Menu for end of transfer of flash ROM memory

When the P-CODE loader function is executed, the function starts


initializing the RAM area.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE

][

162

][

][

][

J.2.2
Loading Start Menu

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Upon completion of RAM area initialization, the loading start menu is


displayed.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

LOADING READY ? : YES/NO

][

][

YES

][

NO

][

[ YES ] :

Starts loading data into DRAM.

[ NO

Cancels loading data (IPL menu reappears).

] :

Once preparations for data transfer have been completed on the personal
computer, press the [YES] soft key. The CNC enters the data reception
wait state. To start data transfer, execute the data transfer command (see
Section 4.3) from the personal computer.

J.2.3
Loading Menu

When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as
shown below.
Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together
with its address, are displayed.
An asterisk corresponds to about 8k bytes.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE

][

163

][

][

][

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

J.2.4
Loading End Menu

When loading ends, either of the following screens appears to indicate


whether loading terminated normally. (For normal termination)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxx BYTES


LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? : YES/NO
[

][

][

YES

][

NO

][

[ YES ] :

Starts writing data into flash ROM memory.

[ NO

Cancels writing data into flash ROM memory (IPL menu


reappears).

] :

Specify whether writing data into flash ROM memory is started by


selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
(For abnormal termination)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

(ERROR OCCURED)
ILLEGAL CHARACTER
LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO
[

][

[ YES ] :

][

YES

][

NO

][

Starts reloading data into DRAM.

NOTE
Reloading data is started after DRAM is initialized.

[ NO

] :

Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears).


164

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

NOTE
The IPL menu reappears after DRAM is initialized.
Specify whether reloading data into DRAM is started by selecting the
[YES] or [NO] soft key.

165

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

J.2.5
Menu for Transferring
Data into FLASH ROM
Memory

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

The following menu is displayed while data is being transferred from


DRAM into flash ROM memory.
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING


[

][

][

][

][

While data is being loaded into flash ROM memory, EXECUTING


blinks.

166

J.2.6
Menu for end of
Transfer of FLASH
ROM Memory

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

When transferring data into flash ROM memory is completed, either of


the following screens appears to indicate whether the transfer terminated
normally.

(For normal termination)


MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE


[

[ END ] :

][

][

][

][

END

Terminates the P-code loader function (IPL menu


reappears).

(Abnormal termination)
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
(I/O PARAMETERS)
I/O CHANNEL
I/O UNIT
BAUDRATE
STOP BIT
INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0
= 1
=11
= 1
= 1

(ERROR OCCURED)
ILLEGAL CHARACTER
LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO
[

][

][

YES

][

NO

][

[ YES ] : Starts reloading data into flash ROM memory.


[ NO ] : Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears).
Specify whether reloading data into flash ROM memory is started by
selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

167

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

J.2.7
Notes

(1) The Series 20 uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and output during
loading. The Series 20 cannot use another channel for loading.
(2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not
supported.
The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether
ASCII or ISO data is being used.
(3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the
RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters
cannot be specified using the loading screen.
(4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading
is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether
both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the
P-CODE section is transferred.
(5) For the first loading after the RAM module is mounted, set the PLD
bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so that the data including the
executor section is loaded.

168

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

J.3
PARAMETER

Address
0020

I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I/O CHANNEL

Setting Entry
Data type
: Byte
Data range
: 0 to 3
Select an I/ O device used.
0 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
1 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
2 : Select a device connected to channel 2.
(I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD)
I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0101

#3

#2

#1

ASI

Data type
SB2

#0
SB2

: Bit
: Number of stop bits:
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
: Input data code:
0 : ISO
1 : ASCII

ASI

NOTE
EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER.
Address
0102

Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)

Data type
: Byte
Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according
to Table 1.
Table 1
Set value

Specification of I/O device

RS232C

FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE


B1/B2)

FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)

FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate


FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

Unused

Portable tape reader

FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER.


169

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
0103

Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)

Data type
: Byte
Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2.
Table 2
Set

Baud rate

Set

50

100

110

150

Baud rate

Set

Baud rate

20

2400

300

10

4800

600

11

9600

1200

12

19200

Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for PCODE LOADER.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0111

#3

#2

#1

ASI

#0
SB2

Data type
: Bit
These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit
is the same as parameter no. 101.
Address
0112

Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)

Data type
: Byte
Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1
according to Table 1.
Address
0113

Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )

Data type
: Byte
Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

0121

#4

#3

#2

ASI

#1

#0
SB2

Data type
: Bit
These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each
bit is the same as parameter no. 101.
Address
0122

Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)

Data type
: Byte
Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2
according to Table 1.
Address
0123

Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=2 )

Data type
: Byte
Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2.
170

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Bit No.
Address

#7

8701

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

PLD

Data type
: Bit
PLD : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer
0 : Clears RAM of macro compiler and rewrites all contents.
1 : Do not clear RAM of macro compiler and overwrites it.

171

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION


(FOR Series 20)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

J.4
ALARMS

Message

Meaning

EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING

Macro executer option is not


equipped.

I/O OPTION NOTHING

Reader/puncher control 1 option is


not selected.

I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING

Reader/puncher control 2 option is


not selected.

ILLEGAL CHANNEL

A channel other than channel 1 and 2


is selected.

ILLEGAL CHARACTER

Transferred data is not correct.

OVERRUN

Overrun error.

FRAMING ERROR

Framing error.

DSR SIGNAL OFF

Communication error.

PARITY ERROR

Data with no parity was transferred.

CHECK SUM ERROR

Check sum error.

UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR


NOT MOUNTED

F-ROM module is unknown or not


mounted.

ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION

F-ROM file ID is incorrect.

NO SPACE

There is no space in F- ROM module.

ERASE ERROR

Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM


may be defective.

PROGRAM ERROR

Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may


be defective.

172

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

173

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K.1
OUTLINE

The boot system of the Series 15-B/15i-A first loads the CNC system
software (Flash Memory (F-ROM) DRAM), then starts execution of
the CNC software so that other software can be executed.
The Series 15-B/15i-A boot system supports the following system
maintenance functions:
(1) Registering a file in F-ROM
D Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card
conforming to JEIDA V4.1.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in F-ROM
(3) Deleting a file from F-ROM
(4) Writing a file in F-ROM to a memory card
(5) Registering a ROM-format file stored on a macro cassette (ROM
cassette) into F-ROM (only series 15-B)
This appendix describes how to register/delete macro programs into/from
the Series 15-B/15i-A by using the above functions.
CAUTION
1 Memory card handling
A memory card can be inserted or removed while the power
is on. While the boot system is running, however, insert or
remove a memory card only while the main menu is
displayed.
2 ROM cassette handling (Only Series 15-B)
Turn off the power before attempting to insert or remove a
ROM cassette.
* For the Series 15B and 15iA, the display numbers and order may
differ. The operation method is, however, the same. In the text of this
manual, the screens of the Series 15B are used. For details of the
Series 15iA, refer to the Maintenance Manual (B63325EN).

174

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

K.2
MEMORY CARD
SPECIFICATIONS
AND RESTRICTIONS

(a) Specifications
For the Series 15-B/15i-A boot system, commercially available
memory cards conforming to the following specification can be used:
Format : JEIDA Ver. 4 or above
Capacity : 512K bytes or more (for macro compilers)
(b) Size of MEM-format file
The following table lists the maximum size of a MEM-format file
which can be saved to a memory card:
MEM-format file

Size in memory card

256K bytes

262272 bytes (256K bytes + 128 bytes)

512K bytes

524416 bytes (512K bytes + 128 bytes)

NOTE
A MEM-format file cannot be split and saved to two or more
memory card. Always prepare a memory card having a
capacity greater than the size of the MEM-format file to be
saved. Two or more MEM-format files can be saved to a
single memory card.
(c) Restrictions imposed on the boot system
The boot system can access only those files in the root directory. Files
in a subdirectory cannot be accessed. In principle, for the boot
system, do not use a memory card containing a subdirectory.

175

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K.3
STARTING THE
BOOT SYSTEM

The starting procedure depends on whether a MEM-format file is loaded


from a memory card into F-ROM or whether a ROM-format file is loaded
from a ROM cassette.
Starting procedure
Main menu item

Page Up key, Page


Down key

,
(Only Series 15B)

SYSTEM DATA LOADING

Loads a file from a


memory card into FROM.

Loads a file from a ROM


cassette into F-ROM.

SYSTEM DATA CHECK

Lists the files, registered in F-ROM, and checks


the file.

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

Saves a file, registered in F-ROM, to a memory


card.

Page Up key, Page Down key: Turn the power on while holding down
the Page Up and Page Down keys.
, : Turn the power on while holding down the and cursor
keys. (Only Series 15B)
In both cases, the following boot system title screen appears.

RAM TEST
:
ROM TEST
:
DRAM ID
:
SRAM ID
:
FROM (CNC)
:
FROM (PMC)
:
CNC DATA SEARCH

END
END 6014 H
0000
0000
0023
PASS
: sEND

Fig. K.3 (a) Boot System Title Screen

The contents vary with the system being used.

176

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

After power-on, releasing the pressed keys causes the following boot
system main menu to be displayed:
SYSTEM MONITOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

SYSTEM DATA LOADING


SYSTEM DATA CHECK
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
FILE DATA BACKUP
END

MESSAGE
SELECT MODE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.3 (b) Boot System Main Menu

177

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K.4
REGISTERING A
MEMFORMAT FILE,
STORED ON A
MEMORY CARD,
INTO FROM

(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit.
PMC

PSU

Series 15-B
Memory card

Fig. K.4 (a) Mounting of a Memory Card

NOTE
The PMC slot is used as the memory card interface (Main
slot in case of series15iA). The memory card can be
inserted or removed while the power is turned on. When the
boot system is active, make sure that the main menu [see
Fig. K.3 (b)] is displayed on the screen before inserting or
removing the memory card. Otherwise, proper access is not
made, and the contents of the memory card files may be
destroyed.
(2) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the page-up
and page-down keys. Then the boot system is activated. Refer to
K.3. STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM.

178

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(3) Select 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK using the cursor keys and press
the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the
following information is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM DATA CHECK
FILE DIRECTORY
1. OPTIONA3 ( 2)
2. HELP MSG ( 2)
3. DG SERVO ( 1)
4. NC BASIC (10)
5. PCD 256A ( 2)
6. PMC-NA0B ( 1)
7. MCR-CMPA ( 2)
END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.4 (b) DATA CHECK DIRECTORY Screen

Check this screen to see if any MEM format file are (hereinafter called a
PCODE file) registered. If a MEM format file is already registered, its file
name is displayed (see the table below).
Table K.4 R CODE file names

D Series 15B
File name

Description

PCD 256A

For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)

PCD 512A

For systems without a sub-CPU (512K bytes)

PCD 256M

For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)

PCD 512M

For systems with a sub-CPU (512K bytes)

D Series 15iA
File name

Description

PD1M 256K

256 KB for M system

PD1M 0.5M

512 KB for M system

PD1M 1.0M

1024 KB for M system

(4) If a P-CODE file is already registered, delete it. To delete a P-CODE


file, select it with the cursor, then press the delete key. When no
P-CODE file is registered, proceed to step 7.
(5) The message DELETE OK? appears. Make sure that the selected
file is a P-CODE file, then press the input key. If the wrong file has
been selected, press the cancel key.
The DATA CHECK
DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] is then displayed again.

179

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

CAUTION
When an attempt is made to delete a system file, such as
a CNC program or the macro compiler, the message
PROTECT FILE appears on the screen and the attempt is
rejected. However, the system deletes user files, such as
the PMC ladder, without asking for confirmation. Once
deletion has started, the process cannot be halted. If no
backup file exists on a memory card or another storage
medium, the contents of the file cannot be restored in any
way. To avoid such inadvertent deletion of files, make sure
that the correct file has been selected before deleting it.
Also, back up user files at appropriate intervals.

(6) When the file has been successfully deleted, the message DELETE
COMPLETED appears. Press the input key. The DATA CHECK
DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] 1 is then displayed again.
Confirm that the P-CODE file is no longer listed.
(7) Select END and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]
is then displayed again.
(8) Select 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING using the cursor keys, then
press the input key. The directories in the memory card are listed on
the screen.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
FILE DIRECTORY
1.
2.
3.
4.
END

Title

LADDER1. ROM
LADDER2. ROM
TEST. DAT
MACRO. ROM

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.4 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen

CAUTION
If a ROM cassette error occurs, check the title. When the
boot system has been activated by holding down the
page-up and page-down keys, the title should read:
SYSTEM DATA LOADING.
If this title is not displayed, turn off the system power once,
then turn it on again.

(9) Select the P-CODE file using the cursor keys, then press the input key.
180

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(10)The message OK? INPUT/CANCEL appears. To register the


selected program, press the input key. To not register the selected file
cancel, press the cancel key. The DATA LOADING DIRECTORY
screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then displayed again.
CAUTION
The boot system registers any file having the acceptable
format. Once registration has started, it cannot be halted.
If no backup file exists on a memory card or another storage
medium, the previously saved data of the file cannot be
restored in any way. To avoid such inadvertent registration
of files, make sure that the correct file has been selected
before registering it. Also, back up files at appropriate
intervals.
(11)When the file has been successfully registered, the message
PROGRAM COMPLETED appears. Press the input key. The
DATA LOADING DIRECTORY screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then
displayed again.
(12)Select END and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]
is then displayed again.
(13)Select 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK to retrieve the contents of
F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered,
press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)].
(14)Select END on the main menu and press the input key. The blinking
message LOADING CNC DATA appears. The CNC starts up
about ten seconds later.
(15)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally.
(16)Remove the memory card from the memory card interface. The card
can be removed even when the CNC power is on.

181

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K.5
SAVING A
MEMFORMAT FILE
FROM FROM TO A
MEMORY CARD

(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit
to activate the boot system. See steps 1 and 2 of Sec.K.4, Procedure
for registering a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM.
(2) Select 3. SYSTEM DATA SAVE using the cursor keys, then press
the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the
following information is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
FILE DIRECTORY
1. OPTIONA1 ( 2)
2. HELP MSG ( 2)
3. DGTL SRV ( 1)
4. NC BASIC (10)
5. PCD 256A ( 2)
6. PMC-NA0B ( 1)
7. MCR-CMPA ( 2)
END

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.5 DATA SAVE DIRECTORY Screen

(3) Select one of the P-CODE files listed below using the cursor, then
press the input key.
D Series 15B
File name

Description

PCD 256A

For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)

PCD 512A

For systems without a sub-CPU (512K bytes)

PCD 256M

For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)

PCD 512M

For systems with a sub-CPU (512K bytes)

D Series 15iA
File name

Description

PD1M 256K

256 KB for M system

PD1M 0.5M

512 KB for M system

PD1M 1.0M

1024 KB for M system

NOTE
System files, such as the CNC program or the micro
compiler, cannot be saved (if you attempt to save one of
these files, the message PROTECT FILE is displayed).

182

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(4) The message INPUT FILE NAME appears. Input the file name
using the MDI key. A file must be named according to MS-DOS file
naming rules; that is, a file name consisting of up to eight characters
followed by a three-character or shorter extension. During file name
input:
D The cursor can be moved using the cursor ( and ) keys.
D The cancel key functions as the backspace key.
D Pressing the reset key displays the DATA SAVE DIRECTORY
screen [Fig. K.5] again.
D Characters are input in the overwrite mode.
(5) After inputting the file name, press the input key to save the file.
(6) If the save operation terminates normally, the message SAVE
COMPLETED appears. Press the input key. The DATA SAVE
DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.5] is then displayed again.
(7) Select END and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]
is then displayed again.

183

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K.6
REGISTERING A
ROMFORMAT FILE,
STORED ON A ROM
CASSETTE, INTO
FROM

(1) Connect the ROM cassette into which the program has been written
using System P or a personal computer to the ROM cassette adapter
(A20B-2000-0760).

ROM cassette adapter


(A20B-2000-0760)

ROM
cassette

Fig. K.6 (a) Connection of the ROM Cassette to the ROM Cassette Adapter

(2) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, then insert the ROM cassette
adapter into the mini slot of the CNC unit. The mini slot is on the PSU
and is protected with a cover when not in use.
PMC

PSU

Series 15-B

ROM cassette

ROM cassette adapter

Fig. K.6 (b) Connection of the ROM Cassette Adapter to the CNC Unit

CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power of the CNC unit before inserting
or removing the ROM cassette. Inserting or removing the
adapter while the CNC power is on can not only damage the
CNC unit and the ROM cassette but can also destroy
battery-retained data, such as NC programs and
parameters.

184

B66102E/10

APPENDIX

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(3) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the cursor (
and ) keys, and the boot system is activated. Refer to K.3
STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM.
(4) Check the contents of F-ROM. If a P-CODE file is already registered,
delete it. For the deletion procedure, see 2 Procedure for registering
a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM, steps (3) to (7) in
Sec.K.4.
(5) Select SYSTEM DATA LOADING using the cursor keys, then
press the input key. The following contents of the ROM cassette are
read and displayed on the screen:
Title

SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE)


P-CODE 256K (WITHOUT SUB-CPU)

ROM type
Format file

MESSAGE
SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.6 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen (for ROM Cassette)

The type of mounted ROM cassette (ROM format file) is displayed (see the table
below). If the displayed ROM cassette type does not agree with that of the
connected ROM cassette, check the ROM cassette.
ROM cassette/ROM format file

Description

1M-bit ROM without a sub-CPU

P-CODE 256K (without sub-CPU)

2M-bit ROM without a sub- CPU

P-CODE 512K (without sub-CPU)

1M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU

P-CODE 256K (with sub-CPU)

2M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU

P-CODE 512K (with sub-CPU)

CAUTION
If an alarm related to the memory card occurs or when
displaying memory card directories, confirm the title. When
the CNC unit has been activated with the cursor ( and )
keys pressed down, the title should read:
SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE)
If this title is not displayed, activate the CNC unit again.
(6) The message OK? INPUT/CANCEL appears. To register the
P-CODE file, press the input key. To not resister the P-CODE file,
press the cancel key. Then the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then
displayed again.
(7) When the file has been successfully registered, the message
PROGRAM COMPLETED appears. Press the input key. The
main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again.
185

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

(8) Select 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK to retrieve the contents of


F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered
in F-ROM. Press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)].
(9) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, and remove the ROM cassette
adapter from the mini slot. After removing the adapter, place the
cover over the slot to protect it.
CAUTION
Avoid using the CNC unit while the ROM cassette remains
in its mini slot. If the CNC unit is used without removing the
ROM cassette, the data stored in the ROM cassette takes
precedence, disabling the use of the micro compiler and
P-CODE file program resident in F-ROM.
(10)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally.

186

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

K.7
TYPES OF FILES IN
FROM

The following table lists the macro compiler/executer file names


displayed on the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen:
D Series 15B
Displayed name
MCR-CMPA

Type

Description

Macro compiler for systems without a sub-CPU

MCR-CMPM

Macro compiler for systems with a sub-CPU

PCD 256A

Macro program (256K bytes) for systems without


a sub-CPU

PCD 512A

Macro program (512K bytes) for systems without


a sub-CPU

PCD 256M

Macro program (256K bytes) for systems with a


sub-CPU

PCD 512M

Macro program (512K bytes) for systems with a


sub-CPU

D Series 15iA
Displayed name

Type

Description

PD1M 256K

256 KB for M system

PD1M 0.5M

512 KB for M system

PD1M 1.0M

1024 KB for M system

Type Symbols:
S : System file supplied by FANUC. The following operations cannot
be performed on system files:
D Saving to a memory card
D Deletion from F-ROM
NOTE
The system files are necessary when a custom macro
program is directly compiled by the Series 15-B.
U:

Data file created by the user. All supported file access operations
can be performed.

187

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

Library file names of macro library are listed below:


Table L.1 List of Macro Library File Names
System name

Specification

Library file name

Remarks

MACRO LIBRARY (0)

A08B9001J600#ZZ03

FOMC_xx.MEX
FOTC_xx.MEX
FOTTC_xx.MEX

Series 0MC
Series 0TC
Series 0TC (Sub side)

FANUC Series 0i
MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J764#ZZ03

F0IMA_xx.MEX
F0ITA_xx.MEX

Series 0iMA
Series 0iTA

MACRO LIBRARY (16)

A08B9001J610#ZZ03

F16MA_xx.MEX
F16TA_xx.MEX
F16TTS xx.MEX
F16LR_xx.MEX
F16MB_xx.MEX
F16MMB xx.MEX
F16TB_xx.MEX
F16TTB xx.MEX
F16LTB xx.MEX
F16LMB xx.MEX
F16MC_xx.MEX
F16MMC xx.MEX
F16TC_xx.MEX
F16TTC xx.MEX
F16LTC xx.MEX
F16LMC xx.MEX

Series 16MA
Series 16TA
Series 16TTA (Sub side)
For loader control (Model A)
Series 16MB
Series 16MB (Sub side)
Series 16TB
Series 16TB (Sub side)
For T Series loader control (Model B)
For M Series loader control (Model B)
Series 16MC
Series 16MC (Sub side)
Series 16TC
Series 16TC (Sub side)
For T Series loader control (Model C)
For M Series loader control (Model C)

FANUC Series 16iA


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J760#ZZ07

F16MI_xx.MEX
F16TI_xx.MEX
F16TMM_xx.MEX
F16TMT_xx.MEX

Series 16iMA
Series 16iTA
Series 16iTMM (Sub side/M series)
Series 16iTMT (Main side/T series)

FANUC Series 16iB


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J830#ZZ07

16IMB_xx.MEX
16ITB_xx.MEX
16TMMB_xx.MEX
16TMTB_xx.MEX

Series 16iMB
Series 16iTB
Series 16iTMB (Sub side/M series)
Series 16iTMB (Main side/T series)

MACRO LIBRARY (18)

A08B9001J625#ZZ03

F18MA_xx.MEX
F18TA_xx.MEX
F18TTSxx.MEX
F18LR_xx.MEX
F18MB_xx.MEX
F18TB_xx.MEX
F18TTBxx.MEX
F18LTBxx.MEX
F18LMBxx.MEX
F18MC_xx.MEX
F18TC_xx.MEX
F18TTCxx.MEX
F18LTCxx.MEX
F18LMCxx.MEX

Series 18MA
Series 18TA
Series 18TTA (Sub side)
For loader control (Model A)
Series 18MB
Series 18TB
Series 18TB (Sub side)
For T Series loader control (Model B)
For M Series loader control (Model B)
Series 18MC
Series 18TC
Series 18TC (Sub side)
For T Series loader control (Model C)
For M Series loader control (Model C)

FANUC Series 18iA


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J765#ZZ07

F18MI_xx.MEX
F18TI_xx.MEX
F18TMM_xx.MEX
F18TMT_xx.MEX

Series 18iMA
Series 18iTA
Series 18iTMM (Sub side/M series)
Series 18iTMT (Main side/T series)

188

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

System name

Specification

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

Library file name

Remarks

FANUC Series 18iB


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J831#ZZ07

F18IMB_xx.MEX
F18ITB_xx.MEX
18TMMB_xx.MEX
18TMTB_xx.MEX

Series 18iMB
Series 18iMB
Series 18iTMB (Sub side/M series)
Series 18iTMB (Main side/T series)

MACRO LIBRARY
(16 P/L/W)

A08B9001J613#ZZ03

F16LA_xx.MEX
F16PA_xx.MEX
F16WA_xx.MEX
F16LB_xx.MEX
F16PB_xx.MEX

Series 16LA
Series 16PA
Series 16WA
Series 16LB
Series 16PB

MACRO LIBRARY
(15A)

A08B9001J620#ZZ03

F15_A_xx.MEX
F15_B_xx.MEX

Series 15A W/0 sub


Series 15A with sub (Main side 256K
byte)
Series 15A with sub (Sub side 256K
byte)
Series 15A with sub (Main side 512K
byte)
Series 15A with sub (Sub side 512K
byte)

F15_C_xx.MEX
F15_D_xx.MEX
F15_E_xx.MEX
MACRO LIBRARY
(15B)

A08B9001J640#ZZ03

F15B_Axx.MEX
F15B_Bxx.MEX
F15B_Cxx.MEX
F15B_Dxx.MEX
F15B_Exx.MEX
F15B_Fxx.MEX

Series 15B W/O sub 256K byte


Series 15B W/O sub 512K byte
Series 15B with sub (Main side 256K
byte)
Series 15B with sub (Sub side 256K
byte)
Series 15B with sub (Main side 512K
byte)
Series 15B with sub (Sub side 512K
byte)

FANUC Series 15i


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J640#ZZ07

F15IA_xx.MEX

For Series 15iMA

MACRO LIBRARY
(21MB)

A08B9001J690#ZZ03

F20MA_xx.MEX

Series 21MB (D201 series)

F21MB_xx.MEX

Series 21MB (DDA1 series)

MACRO LIBRARY
(21TA)

A08B9001J633#ZZ03

PMDT_xx.MEX

Series 21TA (8860 series)

F21TA_xx.MEX

Series 21TA (8865,8866 series)

MACRO LIBRARY
(21TB)

A08B9001J639#ZZ03

F21TB_xx.MEX

Series 21TB (controller A) (DE01 series)

F21TBN_xx.MEX

Series 21TB (controller B) (DEA1 series)

MACRO LIBRARY
(21TB)

A08B9001J639#ZZ03

F21LTB_xx.MEX

Series 21TB (loader control)

FANUC Series 21iA


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J769#ZZ07

F21MI_xx.MEX
F21TI_xx.MEX

Series 21iMA
Series 21iTA

FANUC Series 21iB


MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B9001J832#ZZ07

F21IMB_xx.MEX
F21ITB_xx.MEX

Series 21iMB
Series 21iTB

MACRO LIBRARY
(20F G)

A08B9001J670#ZZ03

DZ70_xx.MEX

Series 20FA (512K byte)

MACRO LIBRARY
(20F GP)

A08B9001J671#ZZ03

DZ71_xx.EE1
DZ71_xx.EE2

With Series 20FA Guidance Programming function (1M byte)


POC PRG.SRC
FACE PRG.SRC
DRILL PR.SRC
SIDE PRG.SRC
With Series 20TA Guidance Programming function

189

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

System name

APPENDIX

Specification

B66102E/10

Library file name

Remarks

MACRO LIBRARY
(20F GB)

A08B9001J672#ZZ03

DZ72_xx.MEX

Series 20FA (1M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY
(20F GPB)

A08B9001J673#ZZ03

DZ73_xx.EX1
DZ73_xx.EX2

With Series 20FA Guidance Programming function (1.5M byte)


POC PRG.SRC
FACE PRG.SRC
DRILL PR.SRC
SIDE PRG.SRC
With Series 20TA Guidance Programming function

MACRO LIBRARY
(20T G)

A08B9001J675#ZZ03

DZ75_xx.MEX

Series 20TA (512K byte)

MACRO LIBRARY
(20T GP)

A08B9001J676#ZZ03

DZ76_xx.EX1
DZ76_xx.EX2

With Series 20TA Guidance Programming function (1M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY
(20T GP)

A08B9001J677#ZZ03

DZ77_xx.MEX

Series 20TA (1M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY
(20T GPB)

A08B9001J678#ZZ03

DZ78_xx.EX1
DZ78_xx.EX2

With Series 20TA Guidance Programming function (1.5M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY
(20F B)

A08B9001J750#ZZ03

DZ62_xx.MEX

For Series 20FA (1 MB)


The FANUC standard machining guidance cannot be used.

MACRO LIBRARY
(20F GB)

A08B9001J751#ZZ03

DZ63_xx.EX1
DZ63_xx.EX2

For Series 20FA (1.5 MB)


The FANUC standard machining guidance cannot be used.
With guidance programming function

NOTE
xx in a library file name indicates the edition of the library.
Executer file is defined as follows.
Series 15A
CNC system/ROM cassette type

CNC=

CNC2=

without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte

F15_A_xx.MEX

nothing

without SUB CPU / 512Kbyte

F15_A_xx.MEX

nothing

with SUB CPU

/ 256Kbyte

F15_B_xx.MEX

F15_C_xx.MEX

with SUB CPU

/ 512Kbyte

F15_D_xx.MEX

F15_E_xx.MEX

CNC3=

nothing

Series 15B
CNC system/Kind of PCODE file

CNC=

CNC2=

without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte

F15B_Axx.MEX

nothing

without SUB CPU / 512Kbyte

F15B_Bxx.MEX

nothing

with SUB CPU

/ 256Kbyte

F15B_Cxx.MEX

F15B_Dxx.MEX

with SUB CPU

/ 512Kbyte

F15B_Exx.MEX

F15B_Fxx.MEX

190

CNC3=

nothing

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

M. PARAMETERS

PARAMETERS

This section describes the compiler parameters and executor parameter


for the CNC system excluding Series 15.
For the parameters of Series 15, refer to the manuals listed below.,
1) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro
executor) (B61213E1)
2) FANUC Series 15MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro
Compiler/Macro executor) (B62073E2)

191

M. PARAMETERS

M.1
SERIES 15i COMPILE
PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

The compile parameters are initialized to the values set in the PCODE
file at powerup. The parameters cannot be changed from MDI or others.
However, parameters 8547 and 8548, which are used for debugging, can
be set from MDI.
Bit No.
Address

#7

8500

LD6

R05
R10

#6

#5

#4

R10

#3

#2

#1

#1

#0

R05

Size of PCODE file


R10

R05

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

Size of PCODE file


256Kbyte
512Kbyte
1Mbyte
Not defined

LD6 = 1: This bit must always be set 1.


Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

8502

NPE

TMC

EUI

VAR

DBG

SBK

DIR

#0
DIR

= 0 : The program list screen does not show PCODE macro


program numbers.
= 1 : The program list screen shows PCODE macro program
numbers.

NOTE
PCODE macro program names cannot be displayed.
SBK

DBG
VAR
EUI

TMC

NPE

= 0 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is


executed with the debug function, continuous execution
is performed.
= 1 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is
executed with the debug function, singleblock
execution is performed.
= 0 : The debug function is not used.
= 1 : The debug function is used.
= 0 : The PCODE macro variable screen cannot be displayed.
= 1 : The PCODE macro variable screen can be displayed.
= 0 : The PCODE macro uses UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to
UO15 as UI/UO signals.
= 1 : The PCODE macro uses EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00
to EUO15 as UI/UO signals.
= 0 : An execution macro call by a T code is a subprogram call
of O90000.
= 1 : An execution macro call by a T code is a macro call of
O90008.
= 0 : Under RS232C control, % (EOF) is automatically
output.
= 1 : Under RS232C control, % (EOF) is not automatically
output.
192

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

8503

MV7

MV6

MV5

MV4

MV3

MV2

MV1

MV0

MVA

MV9

MV8

ECK

8504

= 0 : PCODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are also


used as custom macro common variables.
= 1 : PCODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are
independent of custom macro common variables.
The following bits of the two parameters set the range of
common variables.
No.8503
MV0 : #100 to 149 MV1 : #150 to 199 MV2 : #500 to 549 MV3 : #550 to 599
MV4 : #600 to 699 MV5 : #700 to 799 MV6 : #800 to 899 MV7 : #900 to 999

No. 8504
MV8 : #200 to 299 MV9 : #300 to 399 MVA : #400 to 499

ECK

= 0 : Command input variable #8501 does not expand the


command keys that can be read.
= 1 : Command input variable #8501 expands the command
keys that can be read.
After the expansion, the following command keys can be
read:
Function
menu key

22

Function
key

POS

23

Function
key

PROG

24

System

27

Function
key

OFFSET
SETTING

25

Function
key

CUSTOM

26

Function
key

Function
key

MESSAGE

28

Function
key

GRAPH

29

Function
key

30

NOTE
If the expansion is performed, pressing any of the command
keys does not terminate the conversational macro function.
Accordingly, the corresponding screen is not displayed.
Conversational macro start control variable #8510 must be
set to 0 to terminate the conversational macro function.
Bit No.
Address

#7

8507

CAN

NTV

#6

#5
PWS

#4

#3

#2

#1

NTV

CAN

#0

= 0 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or


reception under reader/puncher interface control, no
interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key.
= 1 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or
reception under reader/puncher interface control, an
interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key.
= 0 : G336 (data transmission) outputs a blank character for
performing a TV check.
= 1 : G336 (data transmission) does not output a blank
character for performing a TV check.
193

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

PWS

B66102E/10

= 0 : The PCODE work number search is disabled.


= 1 : The PCODE work number search is enabled.
Bit No.

Address

#7

#6

#5

8508

PGR

CLG

B5C

AC1
AC2
TEC
SSC
BSC

=0:
=1:
=0:
=1:
=0:
=1:
=0:
=1:
=0:

PCR

#3

#2

#1

#0

SSC

TEC

AC2

AC1

A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is disabled.


A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is enabled.
A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is disabled.
A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is enabled.
A subprogram or macro call by a T code is disabled.
A subprogram or macro call by a T code is enabled.
A subprogram call by an S code is disabled.
A subprogram call by an S code is enabled.
A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous
function code is disabled.
A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous
function code is enabled.
Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is disabled.
Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is enabled.
CNC program referencing/writing, cutting distance
summation/preset, and RS232C control are disabled.
CNC program referencing/writing, cutting
distancesummation/preset, and RS232C control are
enabled.

=1:
CLG

#4

=0:
=1:
=0:
=1:

Bit No.
Address

#7

8509

GMP

EV1

EV2

MCT

PTC

GMP

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

PTC

MCT

EV2

EV1

= 0 : Expansion PCODE variables (#40000 and after) are


floatingpoint data.
= 1 : Expansion PCODE variables (#40000 and after) are
integer data.
= 0 : PCODE variables (#30000 and after) are floatingpoint
data.
= 1 : PCODE variables (#30000 and after) are integer data.
= 0 : A modal macro call by a G code is a move command call
(equivalent to G66).
= 1 : A modal macro call by a G code is a call in each block
(equivalent to G66.1).
= 0 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF.
= 1 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF CR
CR.
= 0 : The following calls are enabled: call by an M, S, T,
secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by
an axis address during a Gcode call, and a Gcode call
during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous
function, or special code or by an axis address.

194

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

M. PARAMETERS

= 1 : The following calls are disabled: call by an M, S, T,


secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by
an axis address during a Gcode call, and a Gcode call
during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous
function, or special code or by an axis address. (This type
of call is processed as a normal NC command.)
Address
8510

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9001

8511

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9002

8512

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9003

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)


These parameters specify M codes of subprogram
calls for calling programs 9001, 9002, and 9003.
Address
8513

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9010

8514

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9011

8515

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9012

8516

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9013

8517

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9014

8518

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9015

8519

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9016

8520

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9017

8521

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9018

8522

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9019

Valid data range : 999 to 999 (excluding 0, 65, 66, and 67)
These parameters specify G codes of macro calls for
calling programs 9010 to 9019.

195

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
8523

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9020

8524

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9021

8525

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9022

8526

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9023

8527

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9024

8528

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9025

8529

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9026

8530

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9027

8531

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9028

8532

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9029

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)


These parameters specify M codes of macro calls for
calling programs 9020 to 9029.
Address
8533

M code of subprogram call for calling a user program

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)


This parameter specifies an M code of subprogram
call for calling a user program.
Address
8536

Main program number of conversational macro

Valid data range : 1 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the main program number
of the conversational macro.
NOTE
1 The program number of this parameter is set in the
conversational macro execution control variable at
powerup.

Address
8537

Main program number of auxiliary macro

Valid data range : 1 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the main program number
of the auxiliary macro.
NOTE
1 The program number of this parameter is set in the auxiliary
macro execution control variable at powerup.

196

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

M. PARAMETERS

Address
8538

Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (lower limit)

8539

Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (upper limit)

Valid data range : 1 to 9999


These parameters specify the range of call codes of
subprogram calls by a range specification M code.
NOTE
1 If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of
parameter 8538 is greater than the value of parameter
8539, the subprogram call by a range specification M code
is disabled.
2 M30, M98, M99, and M codes used for macro and
subprogram calls are not used as call codes even if the
codes are included in the specified range.

Address
8540

Transmission/receptionwait timeout period (s)

Valid data range : 0 to 180


This parameter specifies a timeout period for the
transmission/reception wait state brought by the
send/receive function (G335 to G338) under
reader/puncher interface control. If 0 is specified, no
timeout occurs.
Address
8544

Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9004)

8545

Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9005)

Valid data range : 65(A) to 90(Z) (excluding O, N, P, L, G, and axis


names)
These parameters specify call addresses of
subprogram calls by a special code.

197

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
8546

Number of Gcode macro calls (multiple) to be defined

8551

First G code for Gcode macro calls (multiple)

8552

First program number of Gcode macro calls (multiple)

Valid data range : Parameter 8546: 1 to 255


Parameter 8551: 9999 to 9999 (excluding 0)
Parameter 8552: 1 to 9999
Parameter 8546 specifies the number of Gcode
macro calls (multiple) to be programmed. Parameter
8551 specifies the first one of the code numbers used
for the calls. Parameter 8552 specifies the first
program number of the execution macro.
If a negative value is specified in parameter 8551, a
modal call is executed. The MCT bit (bit 2 of
parameter 8509) specifies whether the modal call is
executed as a move command call (G66) or as a call
in each block (G66.1).
NOTE
The Gcode macro call (multiple) is disabled in the following
cases:
1 A value beyond the valid range is specified in any of the
parameters.
2 The highest G code exceeds 9999.
3 The highest program number exceeds 9999.
G65, G66, G67, and G codes specified for macro calls are
not used as call codes even if they are included in the range.

Address
8547

Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro program in which a break occurs

Valid data range : 0 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the number of the
conversational or auxiliary macro program in which
a break is caused by the debug function.
NOTE
If either this parameter or parameter 8548 is set to a
nonzero value when the conversational macro is
executed, a break is enabled. The program number
specified in this parameter and the sequence number
specified in parameter 8548 are set as break conditions.

198

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
8548

Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which a break occurs

Valid data range : 0 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the number of the
conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which
a break is caused by the debug function.
NOTE
If either this parameter or parameter 8547 is set to a
nonzero value when the conversational macro is
executed, a break is enabled. The sequence number
specified in this parameter and the program number
specified in parameter 8547 are set as break conditions.

Address
8549

Number of PCODE variables (#30000 and after)

Valid data range : 0 to 100


This parameter specifies the number of PCODE
variables.
The setting of the EV2 bit (bit 1 of parameter 8509)
affects the number of variables that are actually
defined, as follows:
When EV2 is set to 0 (floating point data):
(Value of parameter 8549) 40
Wen EV2 is set to 1 (integer data):
(Value of parameter 8549) 100
Address
8550

Number of expansion PCODE variables (#4000 and after)

Valid data range : 0 to 1970


This parameter specifies the number of expansion
PCODE variables.
The setting of the EV1 bit (bit 0 of parameter 8509)
affects the number of variables that are actually
defined, as follows:
When EV1 is set to 0 (floatingpoint data):
(Value of parameter 8550) 10
Wen EV1 is set to 1 (integer data):
(Value of parameter 8550) 30
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

8555

X08

X07

X06

X05

X04

X03

X02

X01

8556

X16

X15

X14

X13

X12

X10

X09

X08

8557

X24

X23

X22

X21

X20

X19

X18

X17

= 0 : A macro call by an axis address is disabled.


= 1 : A macro call by an axis address is enabled.
199

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

The bits of the parameters select different axes.


No.8555
X01 : First axis
X02 : Second axis
:
No. 8504
:
X24 : Twentyfourth axis
Bit No.
Address

#7

8558

ACS

XDL
PWT

15I

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

ACA

P98

15I

PWT

XDL

ACS

= 0 : A macro call by an axis address always calls O9009.


= 1 : A macro call by an axis address calls a program
depending on the axis.
First axis ! Calls O9031.
Second axis ! Calls O9032.
:
nth axis ! Calls a program having an O number of
9030 + n.
= 0 : Interlock along an axis is disabled.
= 1 : Interlock along an axis is enabled.
= 0 : The conversational macro function is not executed at
powerup.
= 1 : The conversational macro function is executed at
powerup.
The position display screen is normally displayed at
powerup, but the conversational macro function can be
executed to display a special screen.
= 0 : The macro executor function follows Series 15B
compatible specifications.
= 1 : The macro executor function follows original
specifications for the Series 15i.
This bit selects the following specifications:
Series 15B specifications
(15I = 0)

Function

Series 15i specifications (15I = 1)

Character coordinate system


System display part
Soft key frame
Key input line
Command key input
variable by parameter 8501

X0 to 73, Y0 to 26

X0 to 79, Y0 to 26

FS15B

FS15i

Y22
The INSERT, ALTER, and
DELETE keys cannot be
read.

Method of executing both auxiliary


macro and conversational macro

Sequential execution (After


the program end command of
the auxiliary macro is
executed, the conversational
macro is executed.)
When a foreground PS alarm
or MC alarm is issued

Y23
The keys can be read.
INSERT : 31
ALTER : 32
DELETE : 33
Parallel execution

Alarm information of
window function
(foreground PS
alarm of alarm basic
flags)

200

When a foreground PS
alarm is issued. An
MC alarm can be read
with basic flag 2.)

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

P98

ACA

M. PARAMETERS

= 0 : The execution macro for PCODE work number search


is called by a macro call. A local variable used by the
execution macro cannot be used in the main program.
= 1 : The execution macro for PCODE work number search
is called by a subprogram call. A local variable used by
the execution macro is taken over to the main program.
= 0 : A macro call by a T code or axis address always passes
an argument without decimal point as an integer value.
= 1 : A macro call by a T code or axis address passes an
argument without decimal point, adding a decimal point
according to the setting of the DPI bit (bit 0 of parameter
2400).

Address
8570

Graphic coordinate system shift amount (Xaxis)

8571

Graphic coordinate system shift amount (Yaxis)

Valid data range : 320 to 319 (Xaxis), 216 to 231 (Yaxis)


These parameters specify the shift amounts of the
graphic coordinate system in dots.
Address
8572

Address of the interlock mode signal of an axis

8573

Bit position of the interlock mode signal of an axis

Valid data range : 0 to 7


These parameters specify a PMC internal relay (R
area) signal that determines the control mode of the
interlock function of an axis.
Address :
R area number
Bit position : Bit position of the signal
NOTE
The interlock function of an axis is disabled when:
1 The address refers to a position beyond the R area.
2 The bit position is incorrect.

Address
8574

PCODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (top)

8575

PCODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (bottom)

Valid data range : 500 to 999


These parameters specify the range of
batterybacked PCODE common variables (#500
to #999) to be writeprotected.
NOTE
If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of
parameter 8574 is larger than the value of parameter 8575,
no write protection is provided.

201

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
8576

PCODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (top)

8577

PCODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (bottom)

Valid data range : 200 to 499


These parameters specify the range of
batterybacked PCODE common variables (#200
to #499) to be writeprotected.
NOTE
If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of
parameter 8576 is larger than the value of parameter 8577,
no write protection is provided.

202

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

M.2
PARAMETERS
OTHER THAN
SERIES 15i
M.2.1
Compile Parameters
NOTE
Usually, undefined parameters need to be set to 0.
Bit No.
Address
Compile
parameter

#7

9000

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

#6

#5

#2

#1

#0

Bit No.
Address
Compile
parameter

#7

#4

#3

9001

#0

M4MB

M4MB

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

4.0MB

3.0MB

2.0MB

1.0MB

512KB

256KB

128KB

NOTE
1 For the 21-TB (controller A), always specify 128 KB.
2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be
specified.
3 For the 21-MB or, 21-TB (controller B), no more than 1.0 MB
can be specified.
4 For the 0iA, no more than 512 KB can be specified.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

9002

EXT1

PWSR

DAUX

XDIL

EVF

ACL2

ACL1

TCAL

TCAL
ACL1
ACL2
EVF

=0:
=1:
=0:
=1:
=0:
=1:
=0:

Makes invalid the sub-program call with T code


Makes effective the sub-program call with T code
Makes invalid call by the specific code
Makes effective call by the specific code (O9004/#146)
Makes invalid call by the specific code
Makes effective call by the specific code (O9005/#147)
Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the floating
decimal point format
203

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

= 1 : Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the fixed decimal


format
XDIL = 0 : Axis interlock function invalid
= 1 : Axis interlock function valid
DAUX = 0 : Does not make the CUSTOM screen appear at power on
= 1 : Makes CUSTOM screen appear at power on
PWSR = 0 : P CODE work number search function invalid
= 1 : P CODE work number search valid
EXT1 = 0: Extension functions invalid
= 1: Extension functions valid (RS-232-C control, NC
program access)
CAUTION
When EXT1=1, part program memory reduces by 1.63m
D Series 16/18A (part program storage of up to 80m)
D Series 20 (part program storage of up to 80m)
D Series 21MB (D201 series, part program storage of up
to 80m)
D Series 21TB (control unit A)
Bit No.
Address

#7

9003

#6

#5

PTCR

KY20

#4

#3

#2

#1

HRGR

#0
ONMSK

ONMSK= 0 : The O and N numbers are displayed on the CUSTOM


screen.
= 1 : The O and N numbers are not displayed on the CUSTOM
screen.
HRGR = 0 : Standard mode graphic display
= 1 : High resolution graphic mode display (set to H1I
usually)
KY20 = 0 : Not +a to #8501 with decimal point input by key input
variables
= 1 : +a to #8501 with decimal input by key input variables
(+a: +20 for a display with 7 soft keys, +40 for a display
with 12 soft keys)

PTCR

= 0 : Does not output CR code twice in P-CODE variable


outputting
= 1 : Output CR code twice in P-CODE variable outputting
Bit No.

Address
9004

#7

#6

CUTLG NOP_B

#5

#4
HRGC

SP_G_B, SP_G_C
00 : Standard G code system
01 : G code system B
10 : G code system C
11 : G code system C
204

#3

#2
IMG

#1

#0

SP_G_C SP_G_B

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

IMG

= 0 : 16-T type (Special G code)


= 1 : 16-G type (Special G code)

HRGC = 0 : 9I high resolusion monochrome CRT, standard


= 1 : 9I high resolution monochrome CRT, brightness
modulation mode setting (paint)
NOP_B = 0 : When no other address is specified in a block that calls
a subprogram by a T or M code, the block is executed.
= 1 : The block is not executed.
CUTLG = 0 : Does not count cutting distance
= 1 : Count cutting distance
Bit No.
Address

#7

9005

TMACC

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

AXCLS

AX4CL

AX3CL

AX2CL

AX1CL

AX1CL = 0 :
=1:
AX2CL = 0 :
=1:
AX3CL = 0 :
=1:
AX4CL = 0 :
=1:
AXCLS = 0 :

Macro program call by the 1st address is invalid


Macro program call by the 1st address is valid
Macro program call by the 2nd address is invalid
Macro program call by the 2nd address is valid
Macro program call by the 3rd address is invalid
Macro program call by the 3rd address is valid
Macro program call by the 4th address is invalid
Macro program call by the 4th address is valid
Always program O9009 is called irrespective of
specified axes.
= 1 : The program number to be called depends on a specified
axis:
Program O9031 is called when 1st axis is specified.
Program O9032 is called when 2nd axis is specified.
:
:
Program O9038 is called when 8th axis is specified.
TMACC= 0 : Macro call by T code is invalid
= 1 : Macro call by T code is valid
Bit No.
Address

#7

9006

DIOC

#6
NNUM

#5

#4

#3

US19W CNCHG DAUXR

#2

#1

#0

STDM

KEYC

DIOC

= 0 : Standard UI:G54/G55 and UO:F54/F55 are used for


UI/UO(#1000-#1132) of execution macro/
conversational macro.
= 1 : UI:G82/G83 and UO:F84/F85 are used for UI/UO
(#1000-#1132) of execution macro/ conversational macro.

KEYC = 0 : When KEY switch =0, completion code #8529=254 in an


access to NC program
= 1 : KEY switch is not cheched in an access to NC program
STDM = 0 : The mode and status display is changed on the USER-1,
USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the
conversational macro screen is displayed.
= 1 : The mode and status display is left unchanged on the
USER-1, USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the
conversational macro screen is displayed.
205

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

DAUXR

Address

#7

B66102E/10

The conversational macro screen is displayed when


power is turned on while the system is in the emergency
stop state or external reset state.
(Parameter DAUX (No. 9002, #5) must also be set to 1.)
CNCHG : Execution of the conversational macro is continued when
the CUSTM key is pressed while the conversational
macro screen is displayed.
US19W
: The screen for the 9 CRT type is displayed on the 14
CRT type. (USER-1 screen)
NNUM = 0: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen,
the NUM prompt is displayed.
= 1: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen,
the NUM prompt is not displayed.
Bit No.
#6

#5

#4

9007

TIDSP

#3

#2

US19WK TIVR2

#1

#0

TIVR1

TIDSP

The common conversational macro screen for the 2path


control is specified.

NOTE
This setting is validated only for the PATH-2 cassette.
Both TTDSP and CNCHG (No. 9006, #4) cannot be set to
1 at the same time.)
TIVR1

Common conversational macro variables (#10000 to


#19999) are specified.
(1: For variables #10000 to #19999, areas #10000 to
#19999 of the other path are used.)
TIVR2
: Common conversational macro variables (#20000 to
#29999) are specified.
(1: For variables #20000 to #29999, areas #20000 to
#29999 of the other path are used.)
US19WK= 0 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position
of the keyin line is not changed on a window having
seven soft keys.
= 1 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position
of the keyin line is changed on a window having seven
soft keys.
Address

#7

9008

HRGCC

Bit No.
#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

HCAR

MDLP

AX8CL

AX7CL

AX6CL

AX5CL

AX5CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made


invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made valid.
AX6CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made valid.
AX7CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made valid.
AX8CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made valid.
206

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

MDLP = 0 : A G code to cancel modal calling cannot be used to call


a macro to be executed.
= 1 : A G code to cancel modal calling can be used to call
O9006.
MCARG= 0 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is not argument.
= 1 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is argument.
HRGCC = 0 : Does not set the character display screen to brightness
modulation mode.
= 1 : Sets the character display screen to brightness
modulation mode.
#7
9009

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

RSRST

RSRST = 0 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro does not


suspends reader/punch control.
= 1 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro suspends
reader/punch control. (Completion code #8539 = 12)
Address
9010

M code that calls sub-program O9001

9011

M code that calls sub-program O9002

9012

M code that calls sub-program O9003

9013

G code that calls custom macro O9010

9022

G code that calls custom macro O9019

9023

M code that calls sub-program O9020

9032

M code that calls sub-program O9029

9033

M code that calls user program

9034

G code that to cancel the modal call

9035

M code calls sub-program O9001

9036

M code calls sub-program O9002

Parameters 9035 and 9036 specify the bit signal of the internal PMC relay
(R area) that determines the control mode of the interlock function for a
single axis direction.
Signal number (0 to 999): Specifies the number of the internal PMC
relay (R area).
Signal position (0 to 7): Specifies the bit position of the signal.
Example) When parameters 9035 and 9036 are set to 900 and 7
respectively
The interlock function for a single axial direction is validated when the
internal PMC relay (R900, #7) is set to 1 in the JOG or HNDL mode.
207

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Address
9037

Used number of (1/100) of conversational macro exclusive variable

9038

Conversational macro execlusion program at the time of power supply input (CUSTOM screen 1)

9039

Auxility macro execution program number

9040

Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on

(CUSTOM screen 2)

9041

Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on

(CUSTOM screen 3)

9042

M code call by area specification, lower limit M code

9043

M code call by area specification, upper limit M code

9044

Used number of extension conversational macro variables

9045

Starting G code in G code calls of ,range specification

9046

Number of G codes in G code calls of ,range specification

9047

Starting O number in G code calls of ,range specification

9048

Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen (in the X direction)

9049

Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen (in the Y direction)

These parameters specify the distance by which the graphics coordinate


system is shifted on the conversational macro screen in units of dots.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

9100

MSFT

C9WN

DLMT

VKLM

#3

#2

#1

#0

VGCL

VGAR

VGAR = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background


color.
= 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background
color.
VGCL = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background in
a background color.
= 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background
in a background color.
(Usually, set 0.)
VKLN = 0 : Keyin line background display is performed.
= 1 : Keyin line background display is not performed.
DLMT = 0 : The range of display with a color background is limited
to a data area.
= 1 : The range of display with a color background is not
limited to a data area.
(Usually, set 0.)
C9WN = 0 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate
correction is performed for character display.
= 1 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate
correction is not performed for character display. (Valid
only when a background color is provided.)
208

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

MSFT

M. PARAMETERS

= 0 : A soft key frame is not displayed on the CUSTOM


screen.
= 1 : A soft key frame is displayed on the CUSTOM
screen. (Valid only when no background color is
provided.)

209

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

M.2.2
Executer Parameter

Bit No.
Address

#7

9000

L2R

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

MKG

RSC

EXS

STP

NDP

SQN

SQN = 1 : Displays program number of recorded program and


sequence number during execution of a recorded program.
= 0 : Displays program number and sequence number of called
user program during execution of a recorded program.
NDP = 1 : Displays variables for P-CODE program.
= 0 : Does not display variables for P-CODE program.
STP = 1 : Stops execution of conversational macro program. (1 is
set by break function automatically)
= 0 : Execute the conversational macro program.
EXS = 1 : Execute macro statement till the next NC statement has
come with feed hold, during macro statement execution at
execution level.
= 0 : Stop if feed hold acts, during macro statement execution at
execution level.
RSC = 1 : Common variables #100-#149 are cleared to <vacant> if NC
is reset.
= 0 : Common variables #100-#149 do not clear to <vacant> if
NC is reset.
MKG
: Be sure to set to 0.
L2R = 1 : Does not display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen
during execution macro operation.
= 0 : Display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen during
execution macro operation.
Address
9002

Conversational macro break program number

9003

Conversational macro break sequence number

210

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

9010

MA8

MA7

MA6

MA5

MA4

MA3

MA2

MA1

MA1 = 1 :
=0:
MA2 = 1 :
=0:
MA3 = 1 :
=0:
MA4 = 1 :
=0:
MA5 = 1 :
=0:
MA6 = 1 :
=0:
MA7 = 1 :
=0:
MA8 = 1 :
=0:

Masks a first axis address macro call.


Does not mask a first axis address macro call.
Masks a second axis address macro call.
Does not mask a second axis address macro call.
Masks a third axis address macro call.
Does not mask a third axis address macro call.
Masks a fourth axis address macro call.
Does not mask a fourth axis address macro call.
Masks a fifth axis address macro call.
Does not mask a fifth axis address macro call.
Masks a sixth axis address macro call.
Does not mask a sixth axis address macro call.
Masks a seventh axis address macro call.
Does not mask a seventh axis address macro call.
Masks an eighth axis address macro call.
Does not mask an eighth axis address macro call.

NOTE
When compilation parameter bit 4 of No. 9005 (AXCLS) is
set to 1, MA1 masks O9031, MA2 masks O9032, MA3
masks O9033, and so on.
Bit No.
Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

9011

#0
MTC

MTC = 1 : Masks a T code execution macro call.


= 0 : Does not mask a T code execution macro call.

211

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T


LOADING TO FLASH ROM

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM

The FANUC Super CAP T is produced by the custom macros and macro
executor. The FANUC standard conversational automatic function is also
realized by the custom macros. This specification describes the way of
compiling the macros and linking and loading the Super CAP T system
software into a flash rom module in NC system.

212

B66102E/10

N.1
SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
(SETUP)

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T


LOADING TO FLASH ROM

APPENDIX

Before the system installation, please install a memory card adapter in


your personal computer.
(1) Installing the FAPT MACRO Compiler System Software
Install the the FAPT MACRO compiler system software as follows.
1. Insert the disk marked FAPT MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM
v3.1 into the appropriate disk drive.
2. Enter the following command and follow the onscreen
instructions:
?: MSETUP <in> <out>
(example: B:\MSETUP B: C: )
?:
:The root directory of disk drive.
<in>
:Specify the name of the disk drive.
<out> :Specify the drive name of the hard disk to install the software.

The following directories are created once the installation is


complete.
\MCOMP

\TOOL
\MEX
\USR

\TOOL: The FAPT MACRO Compiler system software, batch document


files,and so forth are stored.
\SAMPLE \MEX : Executor directory
\USR : User directory

This specification assumes as follows.


B drive : 5 inch floppy disk
C drive : hard disk
(2) Path Setting
Installed software tools are in \MCOMP\TOOL directory. So modify
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file to contain the following DOS
command entry.
example) PATH=C:\MCOMP\TOOL
(3) Installing the Macro Executor File
Copy the macro executor file from the disk marked MACRO
LIBRAY (16TB SCAP) 1/3 to 3/3
*In explanation, BH0F is the series and _01 is version for
example.
Executor files consists of three files,
BH0F_01. EX1
BH0F_01. EX2
BH0F_01. EX3
COPY B:BH0F_01. EX1 C:\MCOMP\MEX
COPY B:BH0F_01. EX2 C:\MCOMP\MEX
COPY B:BH0F_01. EX3 C:\MCOMP\MEX

(4) Installing the Macro Source File.


Copy the macro source file from the disk maked MACRO LIBRAY.
COPY B:*.SRC C:\MCOMP\USR

213

*.SRC: Macro source file

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T


LOADING TO FLASH ROM

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

N.2
COMPILING

Command
MCOMP0 filespec (*1)
(*1) filespec : Specify a macro program source.
(example)
MCOMP0

BH0F_01

The following files are created once the compiling is complete


normally.
BH0F_01.REL Relocatable file
BH0F_01.REF Reference file
BH0F_01.LST List file
MCOMP0 CAPS_01

The following files are created once the compiling is complete


normally.
CAPS_01.REL Relocatable file
CAPS_01.REF Reference file
CAPS_01.LST List file

214

B66102E/10

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T


LOADING TO FLASH ROM

APPENDIX

N.3
LINKING

(1) Specifying the File to Link


(example)
BH0F.LNK
CNC = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX1
CNC2 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX2
CNC3 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX3
/:
P9000 = 10100000
P9001 = 10000001
P9002 = 11000000
P9003 = 10001001
P9007 = 01000000
P9033 = 97
P9037 = 7
P9044 = 2044
/:
FILE = \MCOMP\USR\BH0F_01
FILE = \MCOMP\USR\CAPS_01
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
/:

Executor file

Compile parameter

Relocatable file
(Compiled macro
sourceis specified.)

This link file BH0F.LNK realizes a standard macro function.


In case that new macro source is created, add the file name to this link
file.
(2) Execution of linking
Command
MLINK filespec (*3)
(*3) filespec :Specify a link file.
(example)
MLINK BH0F

The following files are created once the linking is complete normally.
BH0F.ROM
BH0F.MAP

Rom file
Map file

If a link error occurs, the error message is displayed and the linking
is aborted.

215

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T


LOADING TO FLASH ROM

APPENDIX

B66102E/10

N.4
WRITE TO THE
MEMORY CARD

(1) Execution of MMCARD


Convert the rom file to memory card file.
Command
MMCARD filespec (*4)
(*4) filespec :Specify a rom file.
(example)
MMCARD BH0F

The following files are created once the MMCARD command is


complete normally.
BH0F.MEM

Memory card file

(2) Write to Memory Card


Write the memory card file BH0F.MEM to a memory card with
memory card adapter.
For writing, refer to your memory card adapters manual.
NOTE
To write the Super CAP T system software, a 4MByte size
card is needed.
Both SRAM type card and FROM type card can be used.

216

B66102E/10

N.5
LOADING TO FLASH
ROM MODULE

APPENDIX

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T


LOADING TO FLASH ROM

According to as follows, load the Super CAP T system software into a


flash rom module in NC system.
1. Insert the memory card into the main boad of NC system.
2. Turn on the power with pushing the both softkey key of
F10(second on the right) and F11(most right)
3. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select 1.SYSTEM
DATA LOADING.
4. Select BH0F.MEM.
5. Loading to flash rom starts. Select END when the loading is
complete.
6. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select 9.END.

217

Index

B66102E/10

[A]
Alarms, 159, 172

[F]
Features, 2

[B]

Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21),


153

Boot Slot Configuration Screen, 124

Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21), 152

Boot System (for Series 15B/15iA), 173

Free Area in Flash Memory (Series 20), 120

Boot System (for Series 16B/C, 18B/C, 20, 21B),


97

Functions, 13

BOOT SYSTEM (For Series 16i/18i/21i), 122

[G]
[C]

GPIB Interface Setting (for Sereis 0, 15A, 16A,


18A), 34

CAP Control Module, 87


Compile Error Code Table, 53

[H]

Compile Parameters, 203, 210


Compile/Link Example, 57

How to View Reference List/Compile List, 36

Compiler Series, 11
Compiling, 214

[I]

Conversion of Table Data with the Macro Linker


(Mlink), 83

Installing the Executor File from the FAPT MACRO


Library Floppy Disk, 9

Conversion to a Memory Card Format (MMCARD)


(This Function is Used in the Series
15B/16B/16C/18B/18C/20/21B/16 iA/18iA
/21iA.), 26

Installing the System from the FAPT MACRO Compiler System Floppy Disk, 7
Introduction, 80

Creating Link Files, 92, 95

IPL Menu, 161

Creating Programs, 91, 94


Creating Programs by Using Super Cap II M/Super
Cap II T with Series 16i/18i, 84

[L]

Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II M,


94

Link Control File, 83

Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II T,


91

Link List File, 83


Linking, 215
Load Basic System Function, 139

[D]

Loading End Menu, 164


Loading End Screen, 149

Determining the Cause of the Nospace State, 120

Loading Menu, 163

Developing a User Module, 88

Loading Screen, 148

Development Environment, 86

Loading Start Menu, 163


Loading Start Screen, 147
Loading to Flash ROM Module, 217

[E]
End of Boot System, 114

[M]

Equipment Configuration, 5
Error Messages and Required Actions, 115, 140

Macro Compiler
(MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15i), 14

Executing the User Program, 89


i1

Index

Macro Converter (MCONV), 81

B66102E/10

Registering a ROMformat File, Stored on a ROM


Cassette, into FROM, 184

Macro Converter (MCONV) Operation Guide for the


FANUC Series 16/18 Super Cap M/Super Cap II M,
79

Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module, 89

Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules, 88

Restrictions Imposed on the System, 90

Macro Linker (MLINK), 17

Rom Write/Verification Parameter Table, 56

Macro Program Input, 24

ROMFormat File Transmitter (CNC) (For Series


16/18/20/21TA), 21

Macro Program Output, 24

ROMFormat File Transmitter (FANUC FA Writer,


GPIB Interface) (for Series 0, 15A, 16A, 18A),
25

Memory Card File Delete Screen, 112, 137


Memory Card Format Function, 113, 138

ROMFormat File Transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/


FANUC FA Writer) (for Series 0, 15A, 16A,
18A), 23

Memory Card Specifications and Restrictions, 175


Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory,
167

RS232C Interface Setting, 33

Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM


Memory, 166

[S]
[N]

Saving a Memformat File from FROM to a


Memory Card, 182

Name of Macro Library, 188

Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure, 125

Notes, 155, 168

Selecting a RS232C/GPIB Interface Control System


(MDEV), 12
Serial Interface Utility, 24

[O]

Series 15i Compile Parameters, 192

Operation, 81

Setting a Macro Password (Series 20), 118

Operation and Corresponding Screens, 100

Setting a Password, 119

Overview, 123

Source File, 81
Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System,
119
Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination
(MTMP), 12

[P]
PCODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series
16B/C, 18B/C, 21TA, Series 16i/18i/21iA), 143

Specifying Environment Variables, 12


SRAM Data Backup Screen, 110, 134

Pcode Loader Function (for Series 20), 160

Starting the Boot System, 98, 123, 176

Parameter, 156, 169

Starting the P-code Loader Function, 145

Parameters, 191
Parameters Other than Series 15i, 203

Super CAP T/Super CAP II T Loading to Flash ROM,


212

Password, 118

Symbolic Macro Program, 27

Path Setting, 10

System Common Symbol Definition


(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF), 39

Processing by Pcode Loader Function, 145

System Common Symbol Definition File, 35

Processing Flow for the Pcode Loader Function, 162

System Data Check Screen, 104, 129


System Data Delete Screen, 106, 131

[R]

System Data Loading Screen, 101, 126


System Data Save Screen, 108

RAM Initialization Screen, 146

System File and User File, 99

RAM Initializing Menu, 162

System Files and User Files, 124

Registering a Memformat File, Stored on a Memory


Card, into From, 178

System Installation (Setup), 6, 213


i2

Index

B66102E/10

[U]
User Modules, 88

[T]
Table Conversion List File, 82
Table Data File, 82

[W]

Transferring the User Module to FROM, 89


Types of Files in FROM, 187

Write to the Memory Card, 216

i3

Jul., 1995

Jan., 1995

Mar., 1994

Mar., 1993

Jul., 1991

Date

05

04

03

02

01

Edition

Addition of Series 20.

Addition of Series 18.

Addition of Series 16B.

Contents

Addition of APPENDIX 10 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT WITH


MEMORY CARDS (SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION only
for Series 21TB).

Addition of Series 21TB

Correction of errors.

Addition of APPENDIX 11 BOOT SYSTEM (For Series


15B).

Addition of Series 21MB.

Edition

06

07

08

09

10

Date

Jan., 1997

Jul., 1997

Sep., 1999

Jul., 2000

Jul., 2001

Contents

Addition of Series 16/18/160/180MODEL C.

Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210iMODEL A

Addition of Series 15iMODEL A

Addition of Series 0iMODEL A

Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210iMODEL B

FAPT MACRO COMPILER(For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B66102E)

Revision Record

Printed at GE Fanuc Automation S.A. , Luxembourg

October 2001